Drilling Procedures Manual

ARPO
ORGANISING
DEPARTMENT
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
TYPE OF
ACTIVITY'
ISSUING
DEPT.
DOC.
TYPE
REFER TO
SECTION N.
PAGE.
OF
STAP
234
6140
TITLE
DRILLING PROCEDURES MANUAL
DISTRIBUTION LIST
Eni - Agip Division Italian Districts
Eni - Agip Division Affiliated Companies
Eni - Agip Division Headquarter Drilling & Completion Units
STAP Archive
Eni - Agip Division Headquarter Subsurface Geology Units
Eni - Agip Division Headquarter Reservoir Units
Eni - Agip Division Headquarter Coordination Units for Italian Activities
Eni - Agip Division Headquarter Coordination Units for Foreign Activities
NOTE: The present document is available in Eni Agip Intranet (http://wwwarpo.in.agip.it) and a
CD-Rom version can also be distributed (requests will be addressed to STAP Dept. in
Eni - Agip Division Headquarter)
Date of issue:
28/06/99
Issued by
REVISIONS
P. Magarini
E. Monaci
28/06/99
C. Lanzetta
A. Galletta
28/06/99
28/06/99
PREP'D
CHK'D
APPR'D
The present document is CONFIDENTIAL and it is property of AGIP It shall not be shown to third parties nor shall it be used for
reasons different from those owing to which it was given
ARPO
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
2 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
INDEX
1.
INTRODUCTION
1.1.
Purpose of the document
1.2.
implementation
1.3.
UPDATING, AMENDMENT, CONTROL & DEROGATION
2.
WEATHER PREDICTION
3.
DOCUMENTATION
10
3.1.
Reporting
3.1.1.
Well Site Reports
3.1.2.
Other Well Site Reports
10
10
11
3.2.
Contractor Performance
11
3.3.
Report Distribution
12
4.
5.
SUMMARY OF OPERATIONS (Land Rig or Jack-Ups)
13
4.1.
Conductor Pipe Installation

4.1.1.
Pile Hammers
4.1.2.
Final Refusal Depth
4.1.3.
Conductor Pipe Connections
4.1.4.
30" CP Driving Procedure
4.1.5.
Drilling And Cementing CP
13
13
18
19
23
30
4.2.
Drilling 26" Hole

4.2.1.
Cluster Wells
4.2.2.
Single Well
4.2.3.
Single Well Using Pilot Hole Technique
31
31
32
33
4.3.
Drilling 17 /2 Hole
34
4.4.
Drilling 12 /4 Hole
36
4.5.
Drilling 8 /2 Hole
37
4.6.
RUNNING OF 7 CASING
37
4.7.
RUNNING OF 7 LINER
38
4.8.
Drilling Slim Hole (5 /8 or 6)
38
4.9.
General GUIDELINES
38
4.10. Top Drive Drilling SystemS

4.10.1. Drilling Ahead In HP/HT Formations
40
40
SUMMARY OF OPERATIONS (Semi-Submersible)
43
5.1.
BOP Stack equipment

5.1.1.
Wellhead Connector
5.1.2.
BOP Rams
5.1.3.
Annular Preventer
43
45
45
48
5.2.
Fail Safe Valves
49
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
6.
7.
8.
3 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
5.2.1.
5.2.2.
5.2.3.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
BOP Control System

Subsea Pods
Accumulators
0
49
54
54
5.3.
RISER AND DIVERTER SYSTEM

5.3.1.
Riser Joints
5.3.2.
Riser Coupling
5.3.3.
Slip Joint
5.3.4.
Tensioning System
5.3.5.
Lower Flex Joints
5.3.6.
Diverter System
54
55
56
56
56
58
58
5.4.
RUNNING THE BOP ANd RISER SYSTEM

5.4.1.
BOP Stack And Riser Preparation
5.4.2.
Running The Bop And Riser
5.4.3.
Landing The BOP Stack
5.4.4.
Testing The BOP Stack
61
61
62
63
63
DRILLING MUD
64
6.1.
General
64
6.2.
Mud properties
64
6.3.
Safety actions
65
6.4.
Drilling with Oil-Based Mud
66
6.5.
Minimum stock requirements
67
TRIPPING AND FILL-UP PROCEDURES
68
7.1.
General PROCEDURES
68
7.2.
Tripping with a top drive
71
7.3.
Flow checkS
71
DRILLING STRING DESIGN/STABILISATION
72
8.1.
STRAIGHT HOLE DRILLING
72
8.2.
Dog-Leg And Key Seat Problems

8.2.1.
Drill Pipe Fatigue
8.2.2.
Stuck Pipe
8.2.3.
Logging
8.2.4.
Running casing
8.2.5.
Cementing
8.2.6.
Casing Wear While Drilling
8.2.7.
Production Problems
72
72
73
73
73
73
73
73
8.3.
HOLE ANGLE CONTROL

8.3.1.
Packed Hole Theory
8.3.2.
Pendulum Theory
75
75
76
8.4.
DESIGNING A PACKED HOLE ASSEMBLY

8.4.1.
Length Of Tool Assembly
8.4.2.
Stiffness
8.4.3.
Clearance
8.4.4.
Wall Support and Length of Contact Tool
76
76
76
78
78
8.5.
PACKED BOTTOM HOLE ASSEMBLIES
78
8.6.
PENDULUM BOTTOM HOLE ASSEMBLIES
80
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
4 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
9.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
8.7.
REDUCED BIT WEIGHT
81
8.8.
DRILL STRING DESIGN
82
8.9.
BOTTOM HOLE ASSEMBLY Buckling
85
8.10. SUMMARY RECOMMENDATIONS FOR STABILISATION
87
8.11. OPERATING LIMITS OF DRILL PIPE
89
8.12. GENERAL GUIDELINES
90
DIRECTIONAL DRILLING
91
9.1.
TERMINOLOGY AND CONVENTIONS
91
9.2.
CO-ORDINATE SYSTEMS
9.2.1.
Universal Transverse Of Mercator (UTM)
9.2.2.
Geographical Co-ordinates
93
93
94
9.3.
RIG/TARGET LOCATIONS AND HORIZONTAL DISPLACEMENT

9.3.1.
Horizontal Displacement
9.3.2.
Target Direction
9.3.3.
Convergence
96
96
97
97
9.4.
HIGH SIDE OF THE HOLE AND TOOL FACE

9.4.1.
Magnetic Surveys
9.4.2.
Gyroscopic Surveys
9.4.3.
Survey Calculation Methods
9.4.4.
Drilling Directional Wells
9.4.5.
Dog Leg Severity
10. CORING
98
99
101
103
105
110
112
10.1. CORE BARREL TYPES AND USES

10.1.1. Wireline
10.1.2. Marine Core Barrels
10.1.3. Rubber Sleeve
10.1.4. Conventional Core Barrel
10.1.5. Inner Tubes
10.1.6. Modified Barrels
112
112
112
112
112
114
114
10.2. GENERAL GUIDELINES
116
10.3. CORING PROCEDURES

10.3.1. Operating Instructions
10.3.2. Preparing for Coring
10.3.3. Starting of the Coring Operation
10.3.4. Possible Cause Of Pump Pressure Changes
10.3.5. Breaking Core (Making A Connection Or Pulling Barrel)
10.3.6. Recovery of the Core
117
117
118
119
120
120
121
10.4. Coring In Deviated Holes

10.4.1. Stabilisation of the Outer Barrel
10.4.2. Stabilisation of the Inner Barrel
10.4.3. Stabilisation of the Drill Collar Assembly
123
123
123
123
11. LEAK OFF TEST PROCEDURE

11.1. TEST PROCEDURE
12. CASING RUNNING AND CEMENTING
124
125
128
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
5 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
12.1. Responsibilities
12.1.1. Casing Check List
12.1.2. Preparation For Casing Running And Cementing
12.1.3. Installation Patterns (For Mechanical Cementing Aids)
12.1.4. Preliminary Operations
12.1.5. Running Procedure
12.1.6. Casing Operations With A Top Drive
128
129
129
133
137
138
140
12.2. CRA CASING OPERATIONS

12.2.1. Preliminary operations
12.2.2. Handling and running CRA tubulars
140
141
141
12.3. CEMENTING AND DISPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

12.3.1. Single Or First Stage
12.3.2. Dual Or Second Stage
12.3.3. Double Stage Cementing In Deep Wells
143
143
147
150
12.4. Mudline Suspension Procedures

12.4.1. Cementing 20" Surface Casing (With Inner Strings)
12.4.2. Cementing Casings With Plugs
151
151
152
12.5. Post-Cementing Operations
152
12.6. Squeezing
153
12.7. LINERS
12.7.1. Preliminary Preparations
12.7.2. Running And Setting
12.7.3. Cementing
154
154
155
156
13. LOGGING
157
13.1. Logging While Drilling (LWD) COnsiderations

13.1.1. Advantages Of Using LWD
13.1.2. Onshore Planning
13.1.3. Rig Planning
13.1.4. Contractor Advanced Knowledge
13.1.5. Rig Monitoring System Requirements
13.1.6. Shock Mechanisms That Can Cause Lwd Tool Failure:
13.1.7. Solutions To Shock Problems:
157
157
157
158
158
158
158
158
13.2. Wireline logging

13.2.1. General Guidelines
13.2.2. Preparations
13.2.3. Quality Control
13.2.4. Handling Explosives
13.2.5. Handling Radioactive Sources
13.2.6. Logging Tool Fishing (overstripping method)
159
159
160
160
161
162
163
14. WELL ABANDONMENT
165
14.1. Temporary Abandonment

14.1.1. During Drilling Operations
14.1.2. During Production Operations
165
165
165
14.2. PERMANENT ABANDONMENT

14.2.1. Plugging
14.2.2. Plugging Programme
14.2.3. Plugging procedure
166
166
166
167
14.3. Casing cutting/retrieving

14.3.1. Stub Termination (Inside A Casing String)
168
168
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
Stub Termination (Below A Casing String)
15. SURFACE WELLHEAD

15.1.1.
6 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
14.3.2.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
168
169
169
15.2. BASE FLANGE INSTALLATION

15.2.1. Welding Procedure
15.2.2. Safety
15.2.3. Pressure Testing
15.2.4. Slips Installation
15.2.5. Casing Preparation
15.2.6. Primary And Secondary Packing Installation
15.2.7. Casing Spool Installation
169
169
171
171
171
172
172
173
15.3. RECOMMENDED FLANGE BOLT TORQUE

15.3.4. Tubing Spool Installation
15.3.5. Primary And Secondary Packing Group Test
174
177
177
177
178
179
15.4. COMPACT WELLHEAD
189
15.5. MUDLINE SUSPENSION

15.5.2. Temporary Abandonment Procedure.
193
196
200
16. DRILLING PROBLEMS
201
16.1. STUCK PIPE

16.1.1. Differential Sticking
201
201
16.2. STICKING DUE TO HOLE RESTRICTION
202
16.3. STICKING DUE TO CAVING HOLE

16.3.1. Sticking Due To Hole Irregularities And/Or Change In BHA
203
204
16.4. OIL PILLS

16.4.1. Light Oil Pills
16.4.2. Heavy Oil Pills
16.4.3. Acid Pills
16.4.4. Free Point Location
16.4.5. Measuring The Pipe Stretch
16.4.6. Location By Free Point Indicating Tool
16.4.7. Back-Off Procedure
205
205
205
206
206
207
207
208
16.5. FISHING
16.5.1. Inventory Of Fishing Tools
16.5.2. Preparation
16.5.3. Fishing Assembly
209
209
210
212
16.6. FISHING PROCEDURES

16.6.1. Overshot
16.6.2. Releasing Spear
16.6.3. Taper Tap
16.6.4. Junk Basket
16.6.5. Fishing Magnet
212
212
213
213
214
214
16.7. Milling Procedure
214
16.8. Jarring Procedure
216
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
7 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
17. LOST CIRCULATION
217
17.1. Loss PREVENTIVE MEASURES

17.1.1. REMEDIAL ACTION (WHILE DRILLING)
217
218
17.2. Use of DOB AND DOBC PILLS
218
17.3. REMEDIAL ACTION (WHILE TRIPPING)
219
17.4. Use of LCM PILLS
219
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
IDENTIFICATION CODE
PAGE
8 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
1.
INTRODUCTION
1.1.
PURPOSE OF THE DOCUMENT

The purpose of this manual is to define Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates policies and
procedures for general drilling operations. These are based on the contents of the Drilling
Design Manual.
The purpose of the manual is to guide technicians and engineers, involved in Eni-Agips
Drilling world-wide activities, through the procedures and the technical specifications which
are part of the corporate standards.
Such corporate standards define the requirements, methodologies and rules that enable to
operate uniformly and in compliance with the corporate Company principles. This, however,
still enables each individual Affiliated Company the capability to operate according to local
laws or particular environmental situations.
The final aim is to improve performance and efficiency in terms of safety, quality and costs,
while providing all personnel involved in Drilling & Completion activities with common
guidelines in all areas world-wide where Eni-Agip operates.
1.2.
IMPLEMENTATION
The policies included in this manual apply to all Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates operations.
All supervisory and technical personnel engaged in Eni-Agips drilling, completion and
workover operations are expected to make themselves familiar with these and comply with
the policies and procedures specified and contained in this manual.
1.3.
UPDATING, AMENDMENT, CONTROL & DEROGATION

This manual is a live controlled document and, as such, it will only be amended and
improved by the Corporate Company, in accordance with the development of Eni-Agip
Division and Affiliates operational experience. Accordingly, it will be the responsibility of
everyone concerned in the use and application of this manual to review the policies and
related procedures on an ongoing basis.
Locally dictated derogations from the policies and procedures herein shall be approved
solely in writing by the Manager of the local Drilling and Completion Department (D&C Dept.)
after the District/Affiliate Manager and the Corporate Drilling & Completion Standards
Department in Eni-Agip Division Head Office have been advised in writing.
The Corporate Drilling & Completion Standards Department will consider such approved
derogations for future amendments and improvements of the manual, when the updating of
the document will be advisable.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
IDENTIFICATION CODE
PAGE
9 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
2.
WEATHER PREDICTION
Weather data for rig locations are required to predict rig downtime, the effects on rig moving,
towing and establishing the rig on location. During drilling operations, a forecasting service is
mandatory in remote areas or where hostile weather conditions may be expected, e.g.
tropical storms.
Operating in cold water environments requires additional forecasting due to the possibility of
experiencing freezing conditions or mobile ice flows.
The site-specific information can be obtained from a certified meteorological and
oceanographic consulting company. To predict weather conditions, the consulting company
must be provided with the well location latitude and longitude or lease block number, the
water depth and expected drilling period.
The weather information required is wind, wave and current specifics for 80% weather
(normal condition), the one year storm, the 10 year storm and the 100 year storm during the
given drilling season.
Further information may be necessary in particular situations or to meet local regulations.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
IDENTIFICATION CODE
PAGE
10 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
3.
DOCUMENTATION
3.1.
REPORTING
3.1.1.
Well Site Reports

It is vitally important that the operation process is fully recorded and documented in a
consistent format, therefore, standard feed-back or report forms with relevant filling
instructions for ensuring a consistent and homogeneous method will be used in technical
data reporting of world wide activities.
It will be the responsibility of the ENI-AGIP and Affiliates Drilling And Completion Supervisor
to ensure the correct filling in and forwarding of the appropriate forms/reports to the
Company Base (Drilling Manager/Superintendent).
The reports necessary for drilling operations are:
ARPO 01
ARPO 02/A
ARPO 03/A
ARPO 03/B
ARPO 04/A
ARPO 04/B
ARPO 05
ARPO 06
ARPO 13
ARPO 20/A
ARPO 20/B
FB 01
FB 02
Initial Activity Report

Daily Report (Drilling)
Casing Running Report (General Data)
Casing Running Report (Job Data)
Cementing Job Report (General Data)
Cementing Job Report (Job Data)
Bit Record
Waste Disposal Management Report
Well Problem Report
Well Situation Report (Well)
Well Situation Report (Wellhead)
Contractor Service and Equipment Evaluation
Contractor Performance Evaluation
Example copies of these reports are included in Appendix A.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
11 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
3.1.2.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Other Well Site Reports

BOP Sketch
After the BOP stack has been installed, the Drilling And Completion Supervisor shall produce
a sketch of the BOP including the size and location of the rams and the depths referred to
RKB and send it with the BOP Test Report.
BOP Test Report
During every BOP test, the Drilling And Completion Supervisor shall prepare a report on the
test results.
Cement Bond Evaluation from CBL-VDL-CET
In the description of a CBL-VDL or CET, the Drilling And Completion Supervisor shall fill in a
report form with the following:
Cementing job summary

Log evaluation
Remarks.
This report shall be attached to the copy of the appropriate log considered.
Well Test String Sketch
If well testing operations are conducted, every test string shall be recorded in a sketch with
the data as listed below, in addition to the general well test data report:
3.2.
String schematic
Component description
Outside diameter
Inside diameter
Capacity
Lengths
Depths.
CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE
There are two forms for the reporting of contractors performance.
Report FB-01 is for reporting of malfunctions and failures in services and equipment.
Report FB-02 is for documenting a contractors performance in relationship to the contract
conditions.
These should be completed giving an explanation of problems encountered and suggestions
for performance improvement.
Both of these forms must be completed in a timely manner at the end of the contractors
operations or at the end of the well, whichever is applicable.
Copies of the these reports are included in Appendix A.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
12 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
3.3.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
REPORT DISTRIBUTION
The following chart details the destination of, frequency and times that reports need to be
distributed.
Form
Freq.
Period/
Rig
Base
Peit
Arpo
Delay
Cont
Comp
R/A
R*/F
R*
Teap
Stap
ARPO-01
Each
Rig
Start of
activity
ARPO-02/A
Daily
1 Day
I/A
R*
R*
R/F
ARPO-03/A
Each
Job
With
ARPO02/A
I/A
R*
R*
ARPO-03/B
Each
Job
With
ARPO02/A
I/A
R*
R*
ARPO-04/A
Each
Job
With
ARPO02/A
I/A
R*
R*
ARPO-04/B
Each
Job
With
ARPO02/A
I/A
R*
R*
End of
phase
1 Day
I/A
R*
I/A
R*
R*
ARPO-05
ARPO-06
On
activity
1 Day
I/A
ARPO-20/A
After job
End of
phase
I/A
ARPO-20/B
After job
End of
well
I/A
FB-01
On
activity
1 Day
R*
R/F
FB-02
6
Months
7 Days
R/A
R*/F
ARPO-13
Legend:
A
F
I
R
R*
R*
Approve
File
Issue
Receive
Receive for relevant action
Table 3.A- Report Form Distribution Chart
Others
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
13 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
4.
SUMMARY OF OPERATIONS (Land Rig or Jack-Ups)
4.1.
CONDUCTOR PIPE INSTALLATION

Conductor Pipe (CP) is necessary to provide a riser and flow path for drilling mud from the
well to the surface pit system. The outside diameter and the wall thickness of conductor pipe
should be chosen according to previous experiences in the area and the selected casing
profile.
30 OD x 1. wall thickness Fe42C has been selected as the Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates
standard for world-wide exploration and development drilling activities, only if this CP is
unsatisfactory should alternatives be considered.
CP can be installed either by driving with a pile hammer or by pre-drilling a hole and
cementing.
4.1.1.
Pile Hammers
Diesel pile hammers (Refer to figure 4.a) are used for surface driving operations on
conductor pipe. The driving depth of the conductor pipe is a function of the sediments in the
ground.
The most common used system is the Delmag - D44 or D46 which has a hammer weight of
18t with a variable delivery fuel pump. table 4.a, shows the specifications of others types of
Delmag Hammers. The Manufacturer's Operating Procedures must be followed when
planning driving operations.
table 4.b, shows the normal and maximum blows/ft for different CPs and different hammer
sizes.
Model
D 22
D 22-02
Energy E
(ft lbs)
Ram Weight
Wr (lbs)
Hammer
Weight Wh
(lbs)*
Blows/Min
EWh
39,700
4,850
11,200
42 - 60
3.6
4,850
11,400
38 - 54
4.3
24,500 - 48,500
D 30
23,800 -54,250
6,600
12,300
39 - 60
4.2
D 30-02
33,700 - 66,100
6,600
13,150
38 - 54
4.8
D 36-02
38,000 - 83,100
7,900
17,700
37 - 53
4.7
D 44
43,500 -87,000
9,500
22,300
37 - 56
3.9
D 46-02
48,400 - 105,000
10,120
19,900
37 - 53
5.3
D 55
62,500 - 117,000
12,100
26,300
36 - 47
4.4
D 62-02
78,000 - 162,000
14,000
17,900
35 - 50
5.8
* This is without any accessories - Add approx 25% of the total weight for accessories.
Table 4.A - Delmag Diesel Hammer Specifications
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
14 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Figure 4.A- Typical Diesel Pile Hammer
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
Pipe Size And

Wall Thickness
20 x .312
20 x .375
20 x .500
20 x .750
20 x 1.00
24 x .500
24 x .625
24 x .750
24 x 1.00
26 x .500
26 x .750
26 x 1.00
30 x .500
30 x .625
30 x .750
30 x 1.00
36 x .500
36 x .625
36 x .750
36 x 1.00
*48 x .750
*48 x 1.00
*
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
15 OF 234
REVISION
Blows Per ft:

Normal
Maximum
Normal
Maximum
Normal
Maximum
Normal
Maximum
Normal
Maximum
Normal
Maximum
Normal
Maximum
Normal
Maximum
Normal
Maximum
Normal
Maximum
Normal
Maximum
Normal
Maximum
Normal
Maximum
Normal
Maximum
Normal
Maximum
Normal
Maximum
Normal
Maximum
Normal
Maximum
Normal
Maximum
Normal
Maximum
Normal
Maximum
Normal
Maximum
STAP-P-1-M-6140
D 22
Hammer Size
D 30
65 - 70
90
65 - 90
120
100 - 150
160
140 - 180
200
90 - 110
150
100 - 120
170
120 - 150
200
150 - 200
250
100 - 150
200
150 - 180
250
200 - 220
300
150 - 200
250
200 - 225
275
250 - 300
350
300 - 350
400
160 - 210
260
210 - 235
280
260 - 310
360
320 - 360
425
55 - 80
110
100 - 120
140
120 - 150
170
80 - 100
140
90 - 110
160
110 - 140
180
150 - 180
200
90 - 100
170
110 - 150
200
175 - 200
250
100 - 150
200
140 - 175
250
150 - 200
300
200 - 300
350
120 - 170
220
200 - 250
350
250 - 350
400
With adapter
Table 4.B - Blows/ft for Various CPs and Hammers
D 44
100 - 130
150
130 - 160
180
150 - 200
250
120 - 140
160
150 - 170
190
180 - 210
280
170 - 180
200
180 - 200
300
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
16 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
The Franks Hydrohammer is an intelligent hammer due to the sophisticated electronic

control design. This control system is capable of regulating the energy for each impact. The
net energy applied to the pile, which is measured during every blow, is monitored and can be
regulated from the maximum to 5% or less. Since the measure of energy is precisely known,
the force applied to the pile can be accurately computed.
One particularly unique advantage of the Hydrohammer is the control systems ability to shut
off the ram automatically if the pile starts to run ahead of the hammer in soft soils, e.g. due
to:
The hammer is not positioned correctly on the pile.

Stroke rate becoming too high.
Blow energy is too high.
Other advantages unique to this hydraulic hammer are:
It can operate at any angle, even horizontally.

It has an optional printer available to produce a
report of the piling operation.
It can be used onshore or offshore, in air or
submerged under water.
and table 4.c shows a Franks Hydrohammer Type S-90.
Figure 4.B - Franks S-90

Hydrohammer
ARPO
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
S-90 Specifications
90 kNm
66,000ft lbs
3 kNm
2,200ft lbs
50lb/min
8.2 kNm/t
2.8ft lbs/lbs
Max. pile energy/blow

Min pile energy/blow
Blow Rate (max. energy)
PEW Ratio
Weights
4.5t
10,000lbs
9.2t
20,300lbs
0.8t
1,800lbs
4.2t
9,300lbs
14.2t
31,400lbs
11t
24,300lbs
Ram
Hammer (in air)
Flat-bottom anvil
Pile sleeve incl. ballast
Total weight in air
Total weight submerged
Dimensions
Outside Dia. of hammer (A)
Length of hammer (B)
Sleeve for piles up to OD (C)
Length of the hammer with sleeve and ballast (E)
610m
24ins
7,880 m
310ins
915m
36ins
9,900mm
390ins
Hydraulic Data
Operating Pressure
Max. pressure
Oil Flow
Power Pack
Hydraulic hose (ID)
17 OF 234
280bar
4,000psi
350bar
5,000psi
220l/min
58gal/min
140KW
32mm
1.25ins
Table 4.C - Franks S-90 Hydrohammer
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
18 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
4.1.2.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Final Refusal Depth

The following procedure details the determination of final refusal depth.
1)
When the driving depth of the conductor pipe is not specified in the Drilling
Programme, the final depth of the driving is the refusal depth.
The refusal value generally used is 1,000-1,100 blows/metre.
Local experience could dictate a different refusal value. The driving depth can be predetermined by conducting soil boring analysis.
Examine offset well data for depths and potential problems in order to determine if the
CP depth is adequate.
2)
The driving depth of the conductor pipe which is specified in the Drilling Programme is
established with the following formula:
Hi = [df x (E+H) - 103 x H]/[1.03 - df + 0.67 x (GOVhi - 1.03)]
where:
Hi
Minimum driving depth (m) from seabed
Elevation (m) distance from bell nipple and sea level
Water depth (m)
df
Maximum mud weight (kg/l) to be used
GOVhi =
integrated density of sediments (kg/dm /10m)
If the refusal depth does not meet this value, internal washing may be required. CP
internal washing might be necessary several times before reaching the planned depth.
3)
It should be noted that if there is a high refusal value in very hard formations, the CP
shoe could collapse.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
19 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
4.1.3.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Conductor Pipe Connections

Conductor pipe joints installed on land rigs, are usually connected by welding bevelled
prepared ends of the pipes together. This is a time consuming operation that requires an
average of three hours per joint.
On a Jack-up, to reduce the time of the operations and when it is practicable, driveable
threaded quick connectors (i.e. the RL-4) and driveable squnch joint connectors such as the
Fast Realising Joint (i.e. the ALT-2), should be used.
a)
A Squnch Joint (Refer to figure 4.c) is a threadless automatic mechanical lock/release

connection that makes up without rotation. The extremely strong weight-set connection
is well suited for connecting large diameter conductor joints, and connecting the casing
to the wellhead housing extension.
The type ALT-2 (Refer to table 4.d) heavy-duty squnch joint is used for pipe joins
generally up to 36 OD, but larger sizes are available. It is easily stabbed, driveable, reusable and can be released mechanically.
It is suitable for the severest conditions above the mud line and can be used below the
mud line when the conductor is driven into place. The 20 ALT-2 is an ideal highpressure housing extension connector, with an internal pressure rating of up to
5,000psi.
The type ST-2 standard duty squnch joint (Refer to table 4.d) is not a driveable
connector. It is used to connect pipe joints up to 30 OD, and is run into a pre-drilled
hole and cemented in place. It is recommended for use above the mud line and is reusable and mechanically released.
b)
The Quick Thread Connection RL-4 (Refer to Table) is a very rigid connection for
conductor and casing connections and requires just one-quarter turn for full make up.
The helix angle of the patented, interlocking thread form, in combination with other
connector geometries creates a preload force between the pin and box. The 30 and
larger RL-4 conductor connectors have a generous shoulder for efficient driving.
Four identical threads 90 apart make-up simultaneously. The thread interface is
tapered at 4 per ft of diameter. The connector box has four slots cut on the OD, close
to the shoulder of the box and the connector pin has four recessed grooves cut on its
OD adjacent to the slots on the box.
To activate the anti-rotation tab, a 90 incision is made with the impact tool into the
anti-rotation slot. A strip of metal is bent into the recessed groove in the pin which
provides a positive mechanical lock.
It does not need power tongs for make-up and is releasable and reusable. It has a high
9 stab angle with dual stab guides. A negative 5 backrake thread interlock reduces
belling tendency. The standard specifications for some selected pin and box sets are
shown in table 4.d.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
20 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Squnch Joint Connectors
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
21 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Table 4.D - Squnch Joint Connectors (continued)
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
22 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Squnch Joint
Quick Thread Connector
Broad Shoulder For Heavy Driving
Positive Stop Load

Shoulder (Drive Shoulder)
Stab Guide
Two-Step Contured Nose

For Easy Stabbing
O - Ring Seal On
Self-Energizing, Single Load Shoulder

Snap Ring For Fast, Positive Makeup
O - Ring Seal On Box

(Two O - Ring Seals May
Be Used For Improved
Fatigue Resistence)
Release Port
9 Stab Angle
Anti Rotation Pin/Slot
Wide Elevator Shoulder For

Easy Handling
Stab Guide
Elevator Shoulder
Figure 4.C - Squnch Joints and Quick Connectors
Pipe OD
(ins)
30
Pipe Wall Connector Connector

Thickness
OD
ID
(ins)
(ins)
(ins)
1.00
31.63
27.50
Tension
Capacity
(kips)
4,600
Bending
Capacity
(kips ft)
2,800
Internal
Pressure
(psi)
4,670
Weight
Pin & Box
(lbs)
625
36
1.50
36.81
31.75
10,000
5,250
3,900
1,000
38
2.00
39.50
31.10
13,500
12,000
4,000
2,300
42
1.00
43.63
39.50
7,063
4,730
2,300
1,523
Table 4.E - RL-4 Rapid Lock Conductor Connector Standard Specifications

(For Selected Pin and Box Sets)
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
23 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
4.1.4.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
30" CP Driving Procedure

Material Requirements
The following materials shall be available on the rig upon arrival on location:
30" conductor pipes as per the Drilling Programme (squnch joints, rapid lock
connectors or welded preparation).
Pile hammer.
Equipment for handling joints.
Welding machine, if using welded connections.
26" bits.
26" stabs as per the BHA program.
20" casing.
20" casing equipment (shoe, etc.).
Plate for 5" DP (inner-string).
20" cementing plug (for emergency).
20" circulating head.
1
17 /2 bits.
1
17 /2 stabs as per BHA program.
1
12 /4 bit and stabs for pilot hole, if necessary.
Sufficient cement for a 20" cementing job.
Material for light slurry, if needed.
Mud materials enough to drill a 26" hole, plus materials for mixing kill mud.
LCM materials.
Sealing adapter assembly for 20 casing cementing job (with 20" 5" DP
centralisers).
Wellhead equipment for 20" casing.
If quick joint is to be used, the following equipment shall be available:
Hydraulic tong 30 type Joy AA -X.

Two hydraulic clamp 30 250t.
Side door elevator.
Hydraulic power unit.
During the installation of the drilling rig, the following operations shall be carried out:
1)
2)
3)
Inspect materials as per the above list.

Mixing mud (this operation is to be started as soon as the rig is in operating condition).
Rig up for driving operations on the 30" conductor pipe.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
24 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Running Procedure, if a quick joint system is used:

1)
2)
3)
4)
The length of each joint will be 12-15m (40-50ft) approximately, unless using nono
standard specification. The driving shoe shall be built as per figure 4.d with a 45
internal bevel on the lower end.
Each joint will be lifted on to the rig floor with a side door elevator, 30 x 150t.
Each joint will be run in hole with a hydraulic clamp, 30 x 250t.
The casing string will be hung of on the slips with a hydraulic clamp, 30 x 250t.
Running Procedure, if a welded joint system is used:

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
The 30" conductor pipe end has to be checked in order to ensure this is a maximum
o
angle of 30 for welding operations.
The length of each joint will be 12-15m (40-50ft) approximately, unless non standard
o
specification. The driving shoe shall be built as per figure 4.d with a 45 internal bevel
on the lower end.
Each joint of CP will have two pad eyes installed appropriately dimensioned and
welded 1.5m below the upper end (Refer to figure 4.e ) and one lifting eye welded
close to the lower end to permit easy handling with the rig crane. Do not weld on pad
eyes if internal or external elevators are available.
A 31" false rotary table, to ensure better pipe stabbing, shall be positioned on top of
the rotary table (Refer to figure 4.f)
The diesel pipe hammer shall be positioned on the rig floor prior to driving operations
and all equipment shall be inspected. Every conductor pipe joint shall be measured
and marked.
Pick up the shoe joint with the travelling block (Refer to figure 4.g), cut and remove the
lifting eye, run the joint through the 31" false rotary table. Land the joint on the pad
eyes.
Pick up the next joint and add to the shoe joint. The connection is obtained by welding
the pipe ends.
Pick up another conductor pipe with the travelling block, cut and remove the pad eyes
on the shoe joint.
Lower the string until the conductor pipe shoe reaches the bottom of the cellar or the
sea bed, if on a Jack-Up.
With the travelling block and the slings, pick-up and stab the pipe hammer onto the last
joint.
Begin driving operations on the conductor pipe, closely monitoring the first blows as
the penetration may be very high.
Stop hammering once the pad eyes are about 0.5m above the 31" false rotary table.
Do not remove the pad eyes.
Remove the pipe hammer.
Pick-up the next joint, make the connection, remove the pad eyes and lifting eye on
previous joint and continue driving operations.
Continue until the planned penetration or the maximum blowing energy is reached
(Refer to the Drilling Programme).
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
25 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Figure 4.D - Drive Shoe
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
26 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Figure 4.E - CP Pad Eyes
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
27 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Figure 4.F - False Rotary Table
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
28 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Figure 4.G - CP Handling Rig Up
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
29 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Note:
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
If the maximum blowing energy is reached before the requested

penetration, proceed as follows:
Remove the hammer.
Install two pad eyes on the 30 CP joint 0.5m above the spider deck level.
Suspend the conductor pipe at rig substructure with four slings.
Cut the 30 CP about 1.5m above spider deck level and remove the cut section.
Remove the 31" false rotary table.
Run a 26" bit + 3 x 9" DC + HW-DP and wash the conductor pipe down to 0.5m above
the present CP shoe.
Pull the bit out of the hole.
Install the 31" false rotary.
Pick up the cut section of conductor pipe and weld it on to the 30 CP string.
Disconnect the suspension slings and cut the pad eyes.
Pick up the pile hammer and resume driving operations again until the planned depth
is reached. This CP internal washing operation may be repeated several times before
reaching the planned depth.
Cut the 30" conductor pipe at a specific depth (according to the drilling programme)
below the rotary table and install the riser bell nipple and diverter assembly. Lay down
the 31" false rotary from the rig floor.
Install two pad eyes on the CP just above spider deck level and anchor the conductor
pipe with four slings to the rig substructure (if required).
Jack-up drilling in deep water, often experience problems with conductor pipe
tensioning. Normal cables and turnbuckles are not sufficient for the wind, wave, current
and temperature conditions which can cause movement when constant tension must
be maintained. To resolve these conductor pipe tensioning problems, a multiple
hydraulic cylinder tensioning system may be used.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
30 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
4.1.5.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Drilling And Cementing CP

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
Note:
Run a 26" bit + float valve + 36" Hole Opener + 1 x 9" Monel DC + 1 x 9" Spiral DC +
5" HWDP + 5" DPs; in offshore operations whith Jack-Ups down to the seabed and
measure the water depth.
Drill to the depth of the first two joints using high viscosity mud (80-120 seconds
Funnel viscosity) and at a very slow pump rate, in offshore operation whith Jack-Ups
space out in order to avoid pulling the bit above the mud line at the first connection
and.
Drill the remaining 36" hole down to the a planned depth (with min WOB and at a
higher pump rate) pumping fresh water (sea water in offshore operations whith JackUps) and a high viscosity mud cushion (at least 20-30 bbls every connection). Pump
mud at a low flow rate if the well doesn't take fluid.
At TD circulate the hole clean, displace the hole with gel mud (50% excess over open
hole volume) and make a wiper trip; in offshore operations whith Jack-Ups make a
wiper trip to the sea bed paying attention not to pull the bit above the mud line.
Run back to bottom. If any fill is found, repeat the previous step otherwise displace the
hole with gel mud (100% excess over theoretical hole volume). Take a directional
survey and pull the 26" bit + 36" HO.
Run the 30" x 1" thick CP and cement it in the hole using an inner string and sealing
adapter (Refer to the Casing Running and Cementing section).
Install two pad eyes on the CP just above the spider deck level and anchor the
conductor pipe with four slings to the rig substructure, if required.
Cut the 30" CP at the specified depth below rotary table according to the Drilling
Programme and make up the diverter assembly.
Install the bell nipple and diverter assembly.
Run the 26" bit and perform a diverter function test from the driller's panel and remote
station as follows:
a)
Close the diverter around drill pipe and circulate through both diverter lines.
b)
Gradually build up to maximum pump rate and record the pressure.
c)
Open the diverter packer.

If a mud line suspension system is used, Refer to section 12.4.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
DRILLING 26" HOLE
4.2.1.
Cluster Wells
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
31 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
4.2.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Run a 26 bit and perform a function test; in offshore operations whith Jack-Ups before
fill the riser with seawater and check the level.
Run the 26" bit + float valve + BHA, specified in the Drilling Programme.
Test the diverter function by circulating with drilling water. Test the lines, all relative
valves and operating functions.
Locate the top of the fill inside the 30 conductor, record and report the depth.
Clean out the 30" CP with high viscosity mud at a starting pump rate of 3,000l/m
reduced to 500l/m when reaching the proximity of the 30" shoe.
Run a Gyroscope inside the 30" conductor and perform a directional survey.
1
Run a 26" bit with a 9 /2" Downhole Motor and drill to the 20" casing depth according to
the programme, allowing a 9-10 m (30 ft) pocket below the 20" shoe. It is advisable to
use the nudging hole technique in this phase (max. drift angle is 3)
Start drilling using high viscosity mud with reduced parameters (i.e.: Q = 1000l/m,
WOB = 0.3t, rpm = 100-120) for the first two joints, in order to prevent under washing
of the nearby casing.
Increase the pump rate as per the Drilling Programme down to the planned 26 hole
depth. While drilling, the mud viscosity must be kept at high values as per the Mud
Programme while keeping the mud density as low as possible. The desilter and
desander must be kept in operation.
Conduct a wiper trip to the 30" shoe and, if it is good, circulate the hole volume
reciprocating the drill string. If an overpull or fill occurs at the bottom, ream the
concerned hole section again.
Displace the open hole with high viscosity mud (80-100sec Funnel viscosity) and pull
out of the hole to run the 20" casing.
Take a directional survey as per the Directional Control & Surveying Procedures.
If a pilot hole is required to nudge the hole, due to drillability problems with the
1
formation or to kick-off above the 20 shoe depth, drill the section with a 17 /2 bit and
1
9 /2 drilling turbine. At the 20 casing depth, spot a pill and pull-out.
1
Open the hole to 26 until 9-10m (30ft) of 17 /2 pocket remains.
Perform a check trip to the 30 shoe and back to bottom, clean out any fill and spot
viscous mud in the open hole section prior to pulling out of hole for running the 20
casing.
Pick up enough drill pipe to reach the planned casing shoe depth with stinger and
stand back in the derrick.
Run the 20" casing, and then run the inner string. Insert the stinger in the casing shoe
and circulate for 10 mins max. to test the stinger seals, checking the casing/DP
annulus level.
Cement the 20" casing as per cementing section. Wait on cement.
Remove the bell nipple and diverter assembly, cut and recover the 20" casing above
the cellar deck level as per the Drilling Programme.
20)
Weld on the bottom base flange and test it.
21)
As soon as the cement samples are hard, run a Gyroscope survey inside the 20"
casing from top of the cement to surface. This will be used as the tie-in to any
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
23)
4.2.2.
32 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
22)
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
previously taken directional survey.

Install the high pressure riser drilling spool, BOP stack and test them as per the Well
Control Policy STAP P1M6150-7).
If skidding the derrick for the next hole, cover the previous welded flange with a plate
to prevent any objects dropping into the hole.
Single Well
1)
2)
Note:
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
Prior to drilling out the 30 CP shoe, mix approx. 50-60m of kill mud at 1.4 SG to be
ready for use if encountering shallow gas; in offshore operations whith Jack-Ups fill the
30 riser with sea water and check the level.
Run a 26" bit + float valve + BHA + 1 stand of DP and perform a diverter function test,
i.e.:
a)
Fill up the well with water.
b)
Close the diverter around the drill pipe and circulate through diverter lines.
Record the time to operate the functions.
c)
Gradually build up to the max. pump rate and record the pressure.
d)
Open the diverter packing.

The diverter system is not a blow-out preventer and is not designed to
hold pressure, but only to direct flow far from the rig .
Drill the 26" hole down to the planned depth as per the Drilling Programme.
Begin drilling with an unweighted gelled mud with reduced parameters (Q = 1000l/m,
WOB = 0-3 t, rpm =100-120) for the first two joints, then increase the pump rate as per
the Drilling Programme.
At 26" hole TD, circulate a volume of mud equal to the capacity of the drilled section.
Perform a wiper trip to the 30" shoe and back to bottom again. Clean out any fill and
circulate to condition the mud.
Take a directional survey with a single shot 10m below the 30" shoe then every 150m
to the 26" hole TD.
Run and cement the 20" casing as per the Casing Running and Cementing section.
Wait on cement.
Remove bell nipple and diverter assembly.
Cut and recover the 20" casing above celler level or spider deck level In offshore
operations whith Jack-Ups as per the rig specifications.
Install the drilling spool, BOP stack and test them as per the Well Control Policy STAP
P1M6150-7).
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
4.2.3.
33 OF 234
Single Well Using Pilot Hole Technique

1)
2)
Prior to drilling out the 30" shoe, mix approx. 50-60m of kill mud at 1.4SG to be used
in case of encountering shallow gas; in offshore operations whith Jack-Ups fill the 30
riser with sea water and check the level.
Run a 26" bit + float valve + BHA + 1 stand of DP and perform diverter function test:
a)
Fill up the well with water.
b)
Close the diverter around the drill pipe and circulate through diverter lines.
Record the time to operate the functions.
c)
Gradually build up to the maximum pump rate and record the pressure.
d)
Open the diverter packing.
Note:
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
Note:
The diverter system is not a blow-out preventer and is not designed to

hold pressure, but only to direct flow far from the rig.
Drill out the 30" shoe and circulate to clean out the hole. Pull the 26" bit.
1
1
Run a bit size between 12 /4 to 17 /2 + Float Valve + BHA.
Drill the pilot hole to the 20" casing point with the following procedure:
a)
Limit penetration rate to one joint per hour.
b)
Limit pump rate to 1,000l/m for first two joints below the shoe then increase the
pump rate as per the Hydraulic Programme.
c)
Stop drilling and monitor for any significant show. Circulate any gas show to
surface.
d)
While pulling out of the hole if swabbing occurs, run back to bottom and circulate
until control is re-established.
e)
Continually observe returns from the annulus. If there are partial losses, cease
drilling and circulate the hole clean before recommencing drilling operations
(Refer to loss circulation remedial operations, section 17).
The pilot hole should be 9-10m (30ft) deeper than 20" casing setting depth.
Take a directional survey with a single shot 10m (30ft) below the 30" CP shoe and at
every 150m (500ft) to TD.
Perform a wiper trip to the 30" shoe and back to bottom again. Clean out any fill and
circulate to condition the mud. Pull out of the hole.
Run a 26 bit with BHA and enlarge the pilot hole to the casing point and perform a
check trip to the 30 shoe then back to bottom. Clean out any fill and spot viscous mud
in the open hole section prior to pulling out of hole for running the 20 casing.
Run and cement the 20" casing with an inner string as per the Cementing section 12.
Wait on cement.
Remove bell nipple and diverter assembly.
Cut and recover the 20" casing above celler level or spider deck level In offshore
operations whith Jack-Ups as per the rig specifications.
Install the drilling spool, BOP stack and test them as per the Well Control Policy STAP
P1M6150-7).
If a mud line suspension system is being used, refer to section 15.5.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
34 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
4.3.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
DRILLING 171/2 HOLE

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
Run a 17 /2 " bit and BHA. Drill out the 20 float collar, cement, casing shoe and wash
down to the rat hole TD. If it is planned to drill a long section, install a well head bore
hole protector into the base flange.
Drill 5m (15ft) of new hole, condition the mud and perform a leak off test (Refer to
section 11).
1
Resume drilling with the 17 /2 bit using the proper BHA for either a vertical or deviated
hole (Refer to section 8.1).
1
Drill the 17 /2" hole down to KOP (if in a deviated hole phase) and change the BHA for
1
the build up. If a well is to be vertical, drill the 17 /2" hole to the casing point.
Drilling parameters and hydraulics will be in accordance with the Contractor Directional
Operators instructions (if present) or as per the Drilling Programme. Mud and bits will
be as per the Drilling Programme.
Take a directional surveys using a MWD tool and/or single shot.
3
At the 13 /8 casing point, circulate the shakers clean. Make a wiper trip to the 20"
casing shoe. Run to bottom reaming any tight spots, circulate to condition the mud and
pull out of the hole.
Run electrical logs as per the Geological Programme.
Run a bit to bottom to check the hole, circulate to condition the mud and pull out of the
3
hole to run the 13 /8 casing.
3
Run and cement the single or dual stage 13 /8 casing (Refer to the Casing Running
and Cementing section 12). Wait on cement.
3
Hang the 13 /8 casing on the bottom flange giving it additional tensile load calculated
as per the Casing Design Manual (STAP P1M6110-8.3.4), if required, and cut the
3
13 /8" casing.
Pick up the BOP stack.
Nipple up the first intermediate casing spool and test it.
Lay down the BOP stack.
3
Install the drilling spool, 13 /8 BOP stack and test as per the Well Control Policy STAP
P1M6150-7). or install a wellhead protection cap and skid the rig as per the skidding
sequence, if drilling cluster wells.
Note:
If a mud line suspension system is being used, (Refer to section 12.4).
Note:
Use the highest grade of 5" DP or HWDP when testing with a cup tester.
table 4.f gives the specifications for Class 1 drill pipe.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
35 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
API Units
DP
(in)
Weight
(lbs/ft)
Grade
API Units
Max. Tensile
Load (lbs)
19.5
E-75
395,595
19.5
X-95
25.6
SI Units
Rated Load
DP
(mm)
Weight
(Kg/m)
Grade
SI Units Max.
Tensile Load
(daN)
Rated Load
316,476
127
29
E-75
176,000
140,800
501,087
400,870
127
29
X-95
223,000
178,400
E-75
530,144
424,115
127
38
E-75
239,900
191,920
19.5
G-105
553,633
442,906
127
29
G-105
246,400
197,120
25.6
X-95
671,515
537,212
127
38
X-95
298,800
239,040
50.0
HWDP
690,750
552,600
127
74.4
HWDP
307,000
245,600
19.5
S-135
712,070
569,656
127
29
S-135
316,900
253,520
25.6
G-105
742,201
593,761
127
38
G-105
330,300
264,240
25.6
S-135
954,259
763,407
127
38
S-135
424,600
339,680
(80% Load )
(lbs)
Table 4.F - Class 1 Drill Pipe Specifications
(80% Load)
(daN)
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
36 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
4.4.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
DRILLING 121/4 HOLE

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
Note:
Run a 12 /4 bit and BHA. Drill out the 17 /2 float collar, cement, casing shoe and wash
down to the rat hole TD. If it is planned to drill a long section, install a wellhead bore
hole protector into the first casing spool.
Drill 5m (15ft) of new hole, condition the mud and perform a leak off test (Refer to
section 11).
1
Resume drilling with the 12 /4 bit using the proper BHA for a vertical or deviated hole.
1
Drill the 12 /4 hole down to KOP and, if in a deviated hole phase, change the BHA for
1
the build up. If the well is to be vertical, drill the 12 /4 hole to the casing point.
The drilling parameters and hydraulics will be in accordance with the Contractor
Directional Operators instructions (if present) otherwise follow the mud and bits drilling
parameters as per the Drilling Programme.
Take a directional survey using a MWD tool and/or single shot.
5
3
At the 9 /8 casing point, circulate the shakers clean, make a wiper trip to the 13 /8
casing shoe and then run to bottom reaming any tight spots. Circulate to condition the
mud and pull out of the hole.
Run the bit to bottom to control the hole, circulate to condition the mud and pull out of
5
the hole for running the 9 /8 casing.
5
Run and cement in the single or dual stage 9 /8 casing (Refer to the Casing Running
and Cementing section 12.1.5). Wait on cement.
5
Hang the 9 /8 casing on the first intermediate casing spool giving it the additional
tensile load calculated as per the Casing Design Manual (STAP P1M6110-8.3.4), if
5
required, and cut the 9 /8 casing.
Pick up the BOP stack.
Nipple up the intermediate casing spool and test it.
Lay down the BOP stack.
Install the drilling spool and BOP stack and test as per the Well Control Policy STAP
P1M6150-7) or install a well head protection cap and skid the rig as per skidding
sequence, if on cluster wells.
If a mud line suspension system is being used(Refer to section 12.4).
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
DRILLING 81/2 HOLE

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
Note:
4.6.
37 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
4.5.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Run a 8 /2 bit and BHA. Drill out the 13 /8 float collar, cement and casing shoe then
wash down to the rat hole TD. If it is planned to drill a long section, install a wellhead
bore hole protector into the second drilling spool.
Drill 5m of new hole, condition the mud and perform a leak off test (Refer to section
11).
1
Resume drilling with the 8 /2 bit using the proper BHA for a vertical or deviated hole.
1
Drill the 8 /2 hole down to KOP and, if in a deviated hole phase, change the BHA for
1
the build up. If the well is vertical, drill the 8 /2 hole to the casing point.
Drilling parameters and hydraulics will be in accordance with the Contractor Directional
Operators instructions (if present) otherwise the mud, bits and drilling parameters will
be as per the Drilling Programme.
Take a directional surveys using a MWD tool and/or single shot.
1
5
At the 8 /2 casing point, circulate the shakers clean, make a wiper trip to the 9 /8
casing shoe and then run to bottom reaming any tight spots. Circulate to condition mud
and pull out of the hole.
Run the bit to bottom to control the hole, circulate to condition the mud and pull out of
the hole for running the 7" casing.
A 7 liner or casing will be run only if required due to drilling problems
before reaching the scheduled TD of well or if well tests have to be
performed.
RUNNING OF 7 CASING
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Run and cement in the single or dual stage 7" casing (Refer to the Casing Running
and Cementing section 12). Wait on cement.
Hang the 7" casing on the second intermediate casing spool giving it the additional
tensile load calculated as per the Casing Design Manual (STAP P1M6110-8.3.4), if
required, and cut the 7" casing.
Remove the BOP stack.
Nipple up the tubing spool and test it.
1
Re-install the BOP stack replacing the 5 lower pipe rams with 5 variables or 3 /2
rams and test them as per the Well Control Policy STAP P1M6150-7).
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Check the inside diameter and rated load of the drill pipe.
Run the 7 liner checking the weight and circulate the liner capacity after the making up
of hanger to check the setting tool seal.
Set the liner as per the Manufacturers Procedure or as per section 12.7.
Cement as per the Casing Running and Cementing section 12, pull the stinger out of
the liner, circulate out the excess cement and condition the mud.
Pull ten stands, circulate and wait on cement. Circulate, pull the setting tool out of the
hole using a spinner.
1
Run a 8 /2 bit to the liner top, clean free of cement and circulate. Perform a seal test of
liner PBR and pull out of the hole.
1
Replace the 5 upper pipe rams with 3 /2 rams and test the BOP stack as per the Well
Control Policy STAP P1M6150-7)
DRILLING SLIM HOLE (57/8 OR 6)

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
4.9.
RUNNING OF 7 LINER
1)
2)
4.8.
38 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
4.7.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Run a 5 /8 or 6 bit and drill out the cementing equipment in the 7 liner or casing.
Drill 5m of new hole, condition the mud and perform a leak of test, if required.
7
Drill the 5 /8 or 6 hole to the planned depth following the specified Mud and Hydraulic
Programme.
At TD make a wiper trip up to the 7 casing shoe, run to bottom again and circulate to
condition the mud. Pull out of the hole.
Run logs as per the Geological Programme.
GENERAL GUIDELINES
1)
2)
3)
4)
All depth measurements will be referenced to RKB (rotary kelly bushing).

A stock of diesel oil, enough for five days of operations, must always be kept on the
rig
A stock of barite (usually 100t is accepted as the minimum stock level calculated on
the basis of the estimated overpressure development, refer to section 6.5) must be
kept on the rig all time during drilling operations.
BHA equipment and drill pipe must be inspected by non-destructive tests, as specified
in the drilling rig contract, by the drilling contractor and any time as required by the
ENI-AGIP representative. For severe or particular difficult drilling conditions refer to the
Drill String/Bottom Hole Assembly Monitoring Procedures For Severe or Particular
Drilling Condition (STAP-M-1-M-5008). As a general rule, the following guidelines
should be used:
Before the start of the Drilling Contract and every 1,500 rotating hours thereafter,
all Drill Pipe bodies shall be ultrasonically inspected. They can be replaced by
another previously inspected string to allow the NDT.
Heavy weight drill pipe bodies shall be ultrasonically inspected every 3,000
rotating hours. They also may be replaced by previously inspected pipe to allow
NDT.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
39 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Before the start of the Drilling Contract and every 300 rotating hours, thereafter,
all drill collars, drill-stem-subs and heavy weight drill pipe thread connections
shall be magnetically inspected. They also may be replaced by previously
inspected pipe to allow NDT.
All stabilisers shall also be inspected every 300 hours as above.
After 200-300 drilling hours (depending on the severity of work) remove four
stands of 5 DP from the top of the BHA and replace them with new ones. The
removed DP must be sent to the Contractor s workshop for inspection.
Five stands of heavy weight drill pipe must be installed between drill collars and drill
pipe.
A float valve or a flapper valve, preferably the vented type, shall be placed immediately
above the bit while drilling pilot holes and larger holes as per the Well Control Policy
Manual (STAP P1M6150-9.3.1). A vented type allows easy recording of the shut in drill
pipe pressure.
A kelly cock shall be run both above and below the kelly. If using a top drive system,
two inside BOPs; one Hydraulically Remote Operated and one Manually Operated,
shall be used.
Fishing operations or major changes in the BHA configuration must be discussed first
with the operations base and approval obtained.
Directional surveys must be performed as per the Directional Control & Surveying
Procedures
Blind or shear rams must be closed every time that tools are out of the hole. Record
the distance between the rotary table and the BOPs.
1
1
A 4 /2 IF or 3 /2 IF pin, threaded circulating head, a kelly cock and a chicksan line,
must be always present on the rig floor ready for use.
For the BOP Testing Procedure, refer to section 5.4.4 BOP and Casing Tests. The
drilling contractor shall be requested to submit a written procedure for BOP testing
prepared specifically for the type of equipment installed on the rig, and obtain the
Companys approval before starting operations.
When a drilling jar is used, never drill past the last two metres of kelly. This practice
allows cocking of the jar if pipe becomes stuck on the bottom. This also applies to top
drive drilling systems.
All tools run in hole must be measured and recorded for length, ID, OD, and a simple
sketch provided and always available on the rig.
When a PDC bit is used to drill out plugs and floating equipment, it is recommended to
use a bit saver floating equipment and a non rotating plug set.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
40 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
4.10.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
TOP DRIVE DRILLING SYSTEMS

The Top Drive Drilling System (Refer to figure 4.h and figure 4.i) consists of a drilling drive
motor that connects directly to the top of the drill string. The motor, which provides the
similar torques and speeds found in most independent rotary drive systems, is mounted to
the rig's conventional swivel and is most commonly a DC drilling motor but hydraulic versions
are also available.
The drill pipe is rotated by the motor through reduction gearing. The swivel attaches to the
travelling block and supports the string weight during hoisting operations.
A unique pipe-handler system, consisting of a torque wrench and a conventional elevator,
assists pipe-handling operations during make up and tripping. The elevator links and
elevator are supported on a shoulder located on the extended swivel stem. These systems
provide the same power as the rotary table without compromising the efficiency of the
conventional hoisting equipment. However they save much time especially in drilling and
reaming operations. as described below.
4.10.1. Drilling Ahead In HP/HT Formations

The intention of this procedure is to maintain full pressure control during drilling operations
and have the bit as close as possible to bottom in case a kick should occur. At the same
time have the kelly valve close to the rotary table in order to carry out jobs which require a
tool joint near the rotary table, e.g. installation of high pressure circulation lines, wireline
lubricator, etc.
The recommended procedure is:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Note:
Make-up a kelly cock (15,000psi) to the single in the mouse-hole. The valve is to be in
the open position.
Make-up the single onto the top drive.
Drill the single and break out above the kelly cock.
Pick-up a new single with another kelly cock (15,000psi).
Break out and lay down the kelly cock in the string.
The kelly cock should be tested to the maximum anticipated surface
pressure each time it is used.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
41 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Figure 4.H - Typical Top Drive System
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
42 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Figure 4.I - Safety Valve Actuator System
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
IDENTIFICATION CODE
PAGE
43 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
5.
SUMMARY OF OPERATIONS (Semi-Submersible)
5.1.
BOP STACK EQUIPMENT

Floating drilling rigs may be equipped with either a one stack or a two stack BOP system.
The two stack system is a combination of a 2,000 or 3,000psi large bore stack and a 5,000,
10,000 or 15,000psi stack. A one stack system is either a 10,000 or 15,000psi system.
The following list gives the common sizes and various configurations:
a)
Single stack systems

3
18 /4" - 10,000 and 15,000psi WP

3
16 /4" - 10,000 and 15,000psi WP

b)
Two stack systems

1
21 /4" - 2,000 and 3,000psi WP

5
13 /8" - 5,000, 10,000 and 15,000psi WP

c)
Configurations
4 rams and 2 annulars
4 rams and 1 annular
3 rams and 1 or 2 annulars
5
The most common configuration consists of a 13 /8" single stack system with 4 rams and 2
annulars (Refer to figure 5.a). This configuration is used in this section as an example to
describe BOP equipment bearing in mind that same principles apply to all types.
A conventional BOP stack consists of two sections, the lower which contains:
Wellhead connector
Ram preventers
One annular preventer
and the upper part which contains:
Hydraulic connector
Annular preventer
Control system pods
Flex joint to the top of which the riser is connected.
This upper part is referred to as the lower marine riser package (LMRP), the term stack
being applied to the lower part. If it ever needs to be repaired during the course of the well,
the package can be retrieved with the riser leaving the stack in position on the wellhead.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
44 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Figure 5.A - Common BOP Stack Arrangement
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
45 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
5.1.1.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Wellhead Connector
The wellhead connector profile must obviously match that of the subsea wellhead. In EniAgip Division and Affiliates use the most common profiles which are Vetco H4 and the
Cameron Collet.
5.1.2.
BOP Rams
Besides being able to seal off the annulus around the drill pipe, the pipe rams can also
support the weight of the drilling string if it needs to be hung-off. The maximum hang-off
capacity is in the region of 600,000lbs (280t), depending upon ram and pipe size. To hangoff the string securely, the rams must be able to be locked in the closed position without risk
of accidental opening.
Cameron
The Cameron U-type preventers use a wedge-lock device (Refer to figure 5.b) to accomplish
this feature. It consists of a tapered wedge, hydraulically operated, which moves behind the
tail rod of the ram operating piston when the ram is in the closed position. Since it can only
move when ram lock pressure is applied and the ram is fully closed, all the ram lock
cylinders on the stack are connected to just two common control lines, lock and unlock. Ram
lock pressure is activated from the surface as an independent command. A pressure
balance system is fitted to each ram lock cylinder to eliminate the possibility of seawater
hydrostatic pressure opening the wedge-lock in the event that the closing pressure is lost.
Shaffer
On a Shaffer type LWS or SL rams, the locking device is actuated automatically whenever
the ram is closed. This is called the Posilock, this system (Refer to figure 5.c) uses
segments that move out radially from the ram piston and lock into a groove in the
circumference of the opening cylinder whenever the ram is closed. When hydraulic closing
pressure is applied, the complete piston assembly moves inward and pushes the ram toward
the wellbore. With the ram closed, the closing pressure then forces a locking piston inside
the main piston to move further inwards and force out the segments. A spring holds the
locking piston in this position so that the segments are kept locked in the groove even if
closing pressure is lost. When hydraulic opening pressure is applied, the locking cone is
forced outward and this allows the locking segments to retract back into the main piston
which is then free to move outwards and open the rams.
Hydril
On a Hydril preventer the ram lock device, called Multiple Position Locking (MPL), operates
automatically through movement of ram pistons.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
46 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Figure 5.B - Cameron 'U' Type Ram Lock Mechanism
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
47 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Figure 5.C - Shaffer 'Posilock' Ram Lock Mechanism
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
48 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Variable Rams
In order to provide more flexibility and perhaps avoid having to pull the stack to change pipe
1
rams when drilling is to continue with 3 /2" drill pipes, variable bore pipe rams can be used.
These are available in a variety of size ranges. They are capable also of being used for
hang-off purpose though the weight they can support depends on the size of pipe they are
closed around. However, variable bore rams are not recommended for stripping operations
or for high temperature application.
Blind/Shear Rams
All subsea stacks contain blind/shear rams. These are designed to cut through pipe and then
seal off the wellbore completely.
For the location of the blind/shear rams and pipe rams refer to Eni-Agip Division and
Affiliates Well Control Policy.
5.1.3.
Annular Preventer
When operating any annular blow-out preventer subsea, the hydrostatic pressure of the
drilling fluid column in the marine riser exerts an opening force on the blow-out preventer.
Therefore, the closing pressure required is equal to the surface installation closing pressure
plus a compensating pressure to account for the opening force exerted by the drilling fluid
column.
On the Hydril GL preventer, which is primarily designed for subsea operations, a secondary
chamber is used to compensate for the effects of subsea operations. The area of the
secondary chamber is equal to the area acted on by the hydrostatic pressure of the drilling
fluid column. The secondary chamber should be hooked up using one of three techniques.
Two of the hook up techniques require adjustment of the closing pressure. The third hook up
techniques requires the secondary chamber to be connected to the marine riser by mean of
a surge absorber, so that the opening force exerted by the drilling fluid column is
automatically counter balanced.
Choke And Kill Line Outlets
The two or more outlets on the stack are usually referred to as the choke and kill line outlets
and is terminology taken from land drilling operations. For floating drilling the functions of
each line are interchangeable since they are manifolded at the rig floor to both the rig pumps
and the well control choke.
For the position of the outlets on the stack, refer to the Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates Well
Control Policy in the Well Control Policy Manual.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
49 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
5.2.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
FAIL SAFE VALVES

These valves are usually mounted in pairs on both the choke and kill lines. They are opened
hydraulically from the surface (0.6galls of fluid is typically required) but once the opening
pressure is released, spring force automatically forces the gate valve closed.
In deep water operations, the hydrostatic head of fluid in the opening line tends to open the
valve. Some designs counter this be incorporating a system which transmits seawater
hydrostatic pressure to an oil chamber on the spring side of the piston to compensate for this
effect. Other designs have separate pressure-assist closing lines, figure 5.d shows a
Cameron type AF fail-safe valve.
o
Due to space limitation, the innermost valve on the stack is usually a 90 type with a flow
target to avoid fluid or sand cutting. The outer valve is normal straight through and must be
bi-directional, i.e. able to hold pressure from on top as well as below for testing the choke
and kill lines.
5.2.1.
BOP Control System

The simplest form of BOP control is to assign a hydraulic line direct to each individual
function. This presents little problem on land rigs where the large number of control lines
required can be easily handled and the distance the control fluid has to travel is not great.
On a subsea stack, this direct control is impractical, too many individual lines would be
needed and the pressure drop inside them would be too great for the reaction time to be
acceptable.
For this reason, other systems have been developed based on the idea of using one main
hydraulic line through which power fluid is sent to the stack and for pilot valves located on
the stack to direct it to the various functions on command from the surface. These
commands can be easily transmitted to the pilot valves either hydraulically, electrically or
acoustically.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
50 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
a)
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Hydraulic Control Systems
The main components of a hydraulic control system are shown in figure 5.e. A master
hydraulic power unit supplies fluid to both pilot and hydraulic lines via accumulator bottles.
The stack can be controlled from this unit or from a remote control panel on the rig floor or
an electric mini panel usually located in the rig office.
Pilot and operating fluid is provided to stack via one of two hose bundles each of which
terminates in a Pressure Operating Device (conventionally termed yellow or blue pod)
mounted on the lower marine riser package. The pods are identical, one providing complete
backup for the other, either one being selected for use from the control panels. A typical
3
hose bundle is made up of a 1" supply hose for the power fluid and up to 64 x /16" hoses for
the pilot fluid. Inside each pod the pilot lines terminate at pilot valves, each of which is
connected to the common power fluid supply. When a particular stack function command is
selected, pilot fluid pressure is directed down a pilot line to the corresponding pilot valve.
This valve opens to allow the operating fluid to pass through it and then via a shuttle valve to
the operating cylinder. The shuttle valves, which are mounted on the stack, allow the fluid to
flow to the operating cylinder from the one selected pod only.
The operating fluid is stored in the accumulator bottles at 3,000psi. This pressure is too high
for normal operation of the annulars or rams and so the control pods contains regulators in
order that closing pressure can be controlled as required (usually from 0 to 1,500psi), though
higher if the situation demands it. The subsea regulator is controlled from surface via a pilot
line and another line returns to a panel gauge and gives the readback operating pressure
downstream of the regulator.
Each control pod is mounted in a receptacle on the lower riser package and can usually be
retrieved independently if repairs become necessary. Whilst the stack is being run, the hose
bundle is fed out from a power driven reel which is equipped with a manifold so that control
of 5 or 6 stack functions can still be maintained during running. Once the stack has been
landed and sufficient hose run out, a special junction box on the reel enables a quick
connection to be made between the pod and the hydraulic unit.
Some of the hydraulic power fluid is stored in accumulators located on the stack in order to
reduce closing times and also to provide a surge chamber effect for the annular preventers.
All the operating fluid on the low pressure side of a function is eventually vented to the sea
via the pilot valves.
This, therefore, necessitates the use of environmentally friendly fluid which must also inhibit
corrosion and bacterial growth as well as being compatible with anti-freeze additives. Large
volume of fluid are prepared and stored near the hydraulic unit and are transferred
automatically to the accumulators by electrically driven triplex pumps whenever accumulator
pressure falls below a preset level. The pilot fluid circuit is closed.
A turbine type flow meter mounted on the hydraulic unit measures the volume of hydraulic
fluid used every time a function is operated. This can indicate for example whether or not a
ram is closing fully or if there is a leak somewhere in the system.
Apart from the close and open positions, it is also possible to place a function in block
position. In this position, the lines carrying pilot pressure to the pilot valves have a vented
spring action in the pilot valves which shuts off the power fluid supply and vents both sides of
the operating piston.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
51 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Figure 5.D - Fail Safe Valve
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
52 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Figure 5.E - Hydraulic Control System
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
53 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
b)
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Electro-Hydraulic Control Systems
The object of the BOP control system is to move sufficient power fluid, at the required
pressure, to the operating cylinder in the minimum time possibly. For very long lengths of
hose bundles (over 2,000ft or 600m), friction losses inside the small pilot lines result in
unacceptably long reaction times. If the diameter of these lines is increased, the hose bundle
would be too bulky to handle so an alternative to a purely hydraulic control system is needed
for deep water operations.
This is satisfied by electro-hydraulic systems in which the hydraulic pilot valves are operated
by electrical solenoid valves in the control pods through lines from surface. High pressure is
taken from the main power line in the pod under control of the solenoid valve and is used as
pilot pressure to open the pilot valve and thus allow regulated power fluid through to the
operating cylinder.
A further refinement to this system reduces all the separate electrical lines in the hose
bundle to only two, down which coded multiplexed signals are transmitted. A multiplex
package in the control pod decodes these signals and activates the corresponding solenoid
valve.
c)
Acoustic Control System
Although in both the control systems described above, redundancy is assured through the
use of two identical control pods, a further fully independent system is sometimes desired for
complete back-up for contingency.
To suit this requirement, acoustic control systems have been designed which can operate
certain selected vital stack functions even if the rig is forced off location and, therefore, is not
physically attached to the wellhead.
This system basically uses a portable battery powered surface control unit connected to
either a hull mounted or portable acoustic transducer to transmit an acoustic signal to a
receiver on the stack. The receiver and the battery powered subsea control unit respond to
the signal and transmit a reply back to the surface. A subsea valve package on the stack
interfaces the acoustic and primary hydraulic systems via shuttle valves. It contain solenoid
valves powered by the subsea battery pack (rechargeable only on surface) and pilot valves.
Pilot fluid, provided from a separate pilot fluid accumulator with power fluid, is stored in a
separate bank of stack mounted accumulator bottles. These store fluid at 3,000psi and can
be recharged via the primary control system. The valve package contains no subsea
regulator, hence, the 3,000psi is applied directly to the operating piston.
A secure coded signalling system and noise rejection circuit eliminate the possibility of a
function being executed by accident. To improve signal reception on the stack, two subsea
transducer are mounted on long horizontal arms which swing down automatically on
opposite sides of the BOP stack when it is lowered.
The transmission range for such a system is in the order of one mile or 2km.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
54 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
5.2.2.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Subsea Pods
As already described, the pods contain the regulators and pilot valves required to direct the
hydraulic fluid to the various stack functions.
The retrievable type is the most commonly used by the industry. The retrievable male portion
of the pod contains all the pod valves, regulators and the hose bundle junction box. Should a
pod valve, regulator or hose bundle malfunction, it is quicker and, hence, less costly to
retrieve the pod than to retrieve the riser and the lower marine riser package.
5.2.3.
Accumulators
Accumulators are used to store hydraulic fluid under pressure. As much accumulator volume
as possible is located on the subsea stack in order to reduce operating time and also to
enable them to act as a surge chamber for the annular preventers.
2
Surface accumulators are pre-charged with nitrogen to 1,000psi (70kg/cm ). Subsea

2
accumulators should be precharged with nitrogen to 1,000psi (70kg/cm ) + 45psi per 100ft
2
(10.3kg/cm per 100m) of water depth to compensate for the hydrostatic head of sea water.
For total accumulator volume refer to the Eni-Agip Well Control Policy.
5.3.
RISER AND DIVERTER SYSTEM

The riser system provides communication between the wellhead and the rig floor in order for
tools to be guided into the well and provide a return path for mud to surface.
A riser systems consists of a number of elements:
a)
Diverter System
b)
Slip Joint
c)
Riser sections
d)
Lower Flex Joint or Ball Joint
e)
Riser Coupling
The most important single parameter in the design and operation of a marine riser is the
tension applied at the top of the riser. This tension is provided by a system of pneumatichydraulic pistons attached to wire ropes which are in turn attached to the outer barrel of the
slip joint. The tension is conveyed through the outer barrel, into the riser string and down to
the ocean floor where it is attached to the wellhead.
The slip joint, or telescopic joint, allows the riser to change length as the vessel heaves, as
the depth changes due to tides, or when the vessel moves laterally away from the wellhead.
To reduce the bending moments in the riser and, therefore the induced stresses, a lower flex
or ball joint is attached to the top of the BOP stack and an upper ball joint, called the diverter
ball joint, is located below the diverter on top of the inner barrel of the slip joint.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
55 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
The diverter and the diverter ball joint are attached between the underside of the drilling floor
and the riser slip joint inner barrel. The drill string and drilling tools are inserted into the riser
through the diverter which also contains the flowlines for circulating the drilling mud.
All risers have integral choke and kill lines. These are permanently attached to the riser
joints and recessed into support flanges for protection.
Some risers are also fitted with mud booster lines. These enter the riser immediately above
the ball joint and are used to increase the velocity of the mud inside the riser when drilling
with a relatively slow pump rate.
The riser is used to run the BOP stack which weighs several hundred thousand pounds. This
is a delicate operation and is usually performed only in calm weather conditions. While
running the BOP, the motion compensator cannot be used so the BOP and riser are forced
to move in time with heave the of the vessel. Landing the BOP is obviously a delicate task
under these circumstances.
All telescopic joints, flex/ball joint adapters and riser joints to be run must have a thorough
magnaflux inspection of the riser couplings and pipe to coupling welds before being used.
The telescopic joint tensioner ring and the riser handling tools should also be inspected by
magnaflux.
Welding on riser couplings, riser pipe, choke/kill lines or choke/kill line stab subs is strictly
prohibited.
5.3.1.
Riser Joints
Riser joints are constructed of seamless pipe, usually 50ft (15m) long, but a selection of pup
joints are available so that the total length of the riser can be adjusted to suit any water
depth.
The pipe material and wall thickness are usually chosen based on the water depth in which
7
1
the vessel will be operating. In shallow water /16" or /2" wall thickness riser made of X-52
1
5
steel is commonly used. Higher strength materials such as /2" to /8" wall X-65 steel are
used in deep water to withstand the higher stresses imposed by high riser tensions.
Buoyancy can be added to the riser to reduce the tension applied. It is usually added for
water depths beyond 1,000ft (300m). With buoyancy added the effective outer diameter of
the riser is 38-44 and, hence increases the amount of storage space required on the rig.
High strength risers are also required to reduce the risk of collapsing in deep water
applications when it becomes evacuated or filled with gas. One option to prevent this is to
insert a mechanical fill-up valve into the riser string which will fill the riser with seawater if it
becomes evacuated.
There are common riser sizes that correspond to the wellhead system and BOP stack bore
size being used. They are classified by their OD, e.g.:
ARPO
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
56 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Wellhead System
Riser Outer Diameter
13 /8
16
16 /4
18 /8
18 /4
21
24
21 /4
Table 5.A - Riser Joint/Wellhead Sizes
5.3.2.
Riser Coupling
There are many styles of riser coupling available with different methods for preloading the
connector. The most important function of the preload is to maintain rigidity in the joint and
preclude mechanical shifting in the presence of alternating bending loads. Alternating
loading will cause less stress if the connector is working within the preload region, thus
increasing fatigue life. Improper preloading and inadequate maintenance are the main
causes of riser failures.
5.3.3.
Slip Joint
The slip joint, or telescopic joint consists of an outer barrel connected to the riser with a
polished steel inner barrel connected to the diverter ball joint.
Rubber packing elements seal the annular space between the two barrels whilst still allowing
the inner barrel to scope up and down. The packing is usually actuated by air and/or
hydraulic fluid pressure which is adjusted so that a small amount of mud is able to leak past
the seal to provide lubrication. Split packings are used so that if a serious wear occurs they
can be replaced without having to remove the inner barrel.
Some slip joints have dual packers with the second packer being used as a back-up and,
while diverting, can be energised to assist in sealing around the inner barrel.
The slip joint is rated to the working pressure of the diverter but when the diverter is used it
will most likely leak unless the packer pressure has been increased. The telescopic joint is a
weak link in the diverter system and needs to be continuously monitored when diverting.
A large ring to which the riser tensioner lines are attached is able to slide over the outer
barrel and butts against a flange on top of the barrel. When tension is applied the ring bears
against the flange to support the riser.
5.3.4.
Tensioning System
Riser tension is provided by a system of hydraulic pistons (tensioners) pressurised by
compressed air. Large air accumulators are used to provide a soft spring effect. The air acts
against the hydraulic fluid with almost constant pressure so that the tension in the wire rope
remains constant over the stroke.
From the tensioners the wire ropes run over sheaves and is turned to the outer barrel of the
slip joint (Refer to figure 5.f).
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
57 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Figure 5.F - Riser Tensioning System
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
58 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
As the vessel heaves downward, the angle of the wire rope with the vertical grows thus
reducing the vertical component of the tension and vice versa when it moves upward. For
this reason the sheaves are placed as close as possible to the path of the riser so that the
cable will be nearly vertical. Further more the sheaves are pivoted so they can follow the
angle of the wire rope as the riser moves about in the moonpool due to the vessel motion.
As the wire rope passes over the sheaves on the tensioners, fatigue occurs. At regular
intervals, depending on the severity of the sea state, each tensioner must be shut down and
the wire line slipped so that the fatigued section is removed.
5.3.5.
Lower Flex Joints

The Flex Joint contains an elastomeric element (consisting of spherical layers of steel
laminates and elastomeric pads) which is held in compression and flexes under shear. The
advantages of the flex joint over a ball joint is that it requires no lubrication and no pressure
balancing. The increased bending moment caused by the stiffness of flex joints causes an
insignificant increase on bending stress in the riser pipe.
o
The flex joint can deflect in any direction up to a max of 10 .

5.3.6.
Diverter System
a)
Diverter System
The subsea diverter system is an integral part of the marine riser system. Diverter
mechanism consists primarily of a packing insert that can seal on drill pipe (or open
hole with an insert plug), a control system, two flow lines, a ball joint and valving.
The Regan (Hughes Offshore) KFD diverter is the most common system used on
today's rigs. There are three basic models:
KFDG (Gimble) which is used on rigs that do not have an upper ball joint.
KFDH (Housing) used on many vessels having limited room between the main
deck and the rotary floor.
KFDS (Seal) which has its housing permanently mounted through or below the
rotary beams.
The H and S models come in reduced bore par or full bore designs.
Each of these diverters is rated to 500psi working pressure. The housing on all three of
these diverters are restrained from moving upwards by locking dogs or downwards by
a shoulder or lower dogs. The diverter is designed to seal on pipe by pressuring up an
outer packer which in turn squeezes on an insert packer. Manufacturers do not
1
recommend the closing of the packer on any pipe smaller than 4 /2 diameter. An insert
plug should be installed when the pipe is not in the hole. The outer packer may rupture
if closed without the insert being in place.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
59 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
b)
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Ball joint
Most floating rigs utilise an upper ball joint located directly below the diverter. In this
position it carries little load and its working tensile load is only the weight of the inner
barrel of the slip joint. Due to this reduced operating load, the ball and socket cavity
may only need to be packed with grease instead of high pressure oil to lubricate the
joint.
o
The ball joint operates up to a maximum deflection of 10 and its pressure rating is to
the working pressure of the diverter minimum.
c)
Diverter Lines and valves

The overboard lines of the diverter system should be 12" or more in diameter in order
to minimise back pressure during high flow rates, which is usually a feature of a
shallow blow-out. Another feature of a shallow gas blow-out is the large amounts of
sand and stones which can be produced. For this reason the lines should be of
consistent diameter throughout their length and as straight as possible to reduce
erosion.
The valves on the overboard lines should be full opening valves with the same ID as
the line and with the same pressure rating as the system.
The diverter control system should provide a sequence of events to ensure that the
well is never shut-in. The system is generally interlocked so that the selected
overboard valve opens and the flowline valve closes prior to the diverter packing
functioning. figure 5.g shows a typical diverter hook-up.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
60 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Figure 5.G - Typical Diverter System
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
61 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
5.4.
RUNNING THE BOP AND RISER SYSTEM
5.4.1.
BOP Stack And Riser Preparation
After 20" casing has been run and cemented, the BOP stack and the riser will be run and
latched.
The BOP stack must be checked and tested and the riser elements inspected in order to
have the equipment ready to run as soon as possible after cementing the 20" casing.
The following is a list of suggested inspections and tests.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
Open all rams.

Check the sealing elements for wear or damage.
Clean the bore and the ram cavities with a high pressure stream of water in order to be
able to detect the presence of dents.
Replace the bonnet seals.
Visually inspect the annulars sealing elements.
Check for trash behind the rubber element of the spherical by measuring the ID of the
element.
Pressure test the stack on the test stump to its rated working pressure (or to the
working pressure of the wellhead connector if this is less than that of the BOP).
Function test the BOP through both pods. Each time a function is operated note the
volume of the fluid used for the functioning and closing times. These figures are
essential to determine whether or not the BOP and its control system are working
correctly.
Pressure test the choke manifold.
Clean and inspect all connectors on the riser sections and pup joints to be used.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
62 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
5.4.2.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Running The Bop And Riser

Before running the BOP stack check the weather forecast and refer to the Rig Operations
manual for the maximum vessel motion (heave, roll and pitch) for running BOP.
Running procedures vary from rig to rig due to the specific design of the stack and to the
handling system (gantry cranes, fork lifts, trolleys, etc.) used for moving the BOP in and out
of the moonpool area. There are also a variety of ways to land the BOP stack. For this
reason provision of detailed procedures is not possible therefore the following steps are only
generic.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
Skid the BOP in the moonpool to a position directly under rotary table.
Insert the guide lines into the posts of the stack.
Place the marine riser handling spider on the rotary table.
Pick up a joint of marine riser using the marine riser handling sub.
Lower the marine riser joint through the handling spider and make up to the top of the
ball/flex joint.
Lift the BOP stack and install a new ring gasket on bottom the of wellhead connector.
Make sure the bulls-eye angle indicators are installed above and below the ball/flex
joint. Ensure they are visible to the subsea TV system.
Lower the BOP stack through the splash zone and land the riser on the handling
spider. The first riser joint above the BOP should be long enough to allow the stack to
be run into the water to dampen its motions.
Continue to run the marine riser on riser joints. The riser couplings should be made up
in accordance with the particular manufacturer's recommended procedures. The
correct make up and preload of each coupling should be verified prior to its use as a
tensile member.
Test the choke and kill lines every third joint.
Install the required riser pup joints to obtain the correct space out, such that the
telescopic joint will be at mid stroke.
Pick up the telescopic joint (also called slip joint), locked in the closed position, and
install onto the riser assembly. Lower the riser assembly until the outer barrel is at the
spider. Land the outer barrel on the spider level.
Stroke out the slip joint inner barrel. Remove the handling spider and lower the
telescopic joint through the rotary table until the riser tensioning cables can be installed
on the riser tensioning ring.
On some rigs the slip joint is run in the collapsed position by using an extra joint of
riser temporarily installed above the telescopic joint.
Either the shoe on the inner barrel and/or the pins that lock the slip joint in closed
position, should be designed to support the combined submerged weight of the stack
and riser as well as dynamic loads.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
Landing The BOP Stack

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
5.4.4.
63 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
5.4.3.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Tension the guide lines for landing the BOP stack.

Run the TV camera or ROV. Focus on the lower extremities of the BOP stack.
Open the motion compensator.
Lower the BOP stack until the connector lands on the wellhead housing. Observe the
landing with the TV.
Latch the connector. With the Motion Compensator make a pick up test of 50,000lbs
(15t) above the stack weight to verify the connector is correctly locked down.
Adjust the riser tensioners to full working tension as per the rig operating manual
and/or riser analysis programme. During the life of the well, it may be necessary to
vary the riser tension due to an increase in mud weight or weather conditions.
Reduce the tension in the guide wires.
Install the choke and kill hoses to the terminal fittings on the slip joint.
Install the slip joint packing control lines.
By pumping down choke or kill line, test the wellhead connector and the casing against
the blind/shear rams to the pressure indicated in the drilling programme.
Install the diverter package and rotary table.
Testing The BOP Stack

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Retrieve the 18 /4 nominal seat protector. Do not land the test plug on the seat
protector since test pressure will force the protector down, swedging it into the
housing.
Run the BOP test plug.
Fill the running string to the top with water. The string must remain open to
atmosphere during the entire test.
Pressure test the BOP stack as per Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates Well Control Policy
using either one of the two pods. A BOP function test must then be performed on the
other pod.
Recover the BOP test plug.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
64 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
6.
DRILLING MUD
6.1.
GENERAL
For detailed drilling fluid information, refer to the Drilling Fluids Manual.
6.2.
a)
A detailed mud programme shall be included as an integral part of the drilling

programme.
b)
A Mud Service Contractor may be contracted for the preparation of the mud
programme, which shall be submitted to the Company Drilling Office for approval
before inclusion in the Drilling Programme.
c)
The same Contractor may be contracted for Mud Engineering on rig site under
the control of the Company Drilling and Completion Supervisor.
d)
No variation from the mud programme is permitted without previous discussion

with and approval of the Company Shore Base Drilling office.
e)
The mud characteristics to be used for specific operations, such as tripping,

casing running, etc., shall be based on specifications described in the relevant
sections of the Drilling Programme.
MUD PROPERTIES
1)
2)
3)
4)
The following parameters of the mud shall be regularly checked, recorded; and also
reported to Company Drilling Office on a daily basis:
Weight
1kg/l = 8.345PPG
Temperature (especially in oil mud)
(C)
Funnel viscosity
(sec)/gal/4
Plastic viscosity
(centipoise)
Yield point
(g/100cm = 0,5lb/100 ft )
Gel strengths
(g/100cm = 0,5lb/100 ft )
Water losses
(cm /30min)
Filter cake
(mm)
Sand content
(% by volume)
Solids content
(% by volume)
Oil content
Calcium content
(% by volume)
(mg/l Ca++)
Salinity
(g/l Cl-)
The Company Drilling And Completion Supervisor shall be notified immediately of any
change in mud properties.
The Driller shall be notified immediately of any variation in mud weight, chloride
content, gas or any other property which may indicate significant changes in the
formation drilled and/or entry into overpressurised zones.
Mud weight and funnel viscosity shall be recorded at least every 30mins at the flow line
and suction pit.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
65 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
5)
When circulating gas cut mud and/or bottoms up, the following data shall be recorded:
Mud weight
Salinity
Maximum gas
Pit level
Interested volume
Depth and time.
6)
The Mud Engineer shall check mud weight at the shakers and downstream of the
degasser continuously when circulating gas cut mud and/or bottoms up.
Rheology shall be checked three times a day or more frequently if requested by
Company Drilling and Completion Supervisor.
Solids control shall be performed using the appropriate equipment, whenever needed.
Maintain the right pressure on the desander and desilter manifold for maximum
performance.
Any addition of oil to the water base mud system shall be previously approved by
Company Drilling Office.
If offshore, the standby boat should be topped up with barite at all times. Never
transport barite in tanks that previously held cement, except in an emergency.
Meter the water and brine additions to the drilling fluid. Report usage daily.
Slug the drill pipe with mud from the standby reserve.
If returns are lost, immediately fill the annulus with water. Measure the volume of water
required and continue filling the hole until the hole stands full. Do not pull the drill pipe
out of the hole until the hole stands full.
A thorough inventory of mud stock will be made on a weekly basis.
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
6.3.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
SAFETY ACTIONS
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
The active mud pit level shall be manually measured and recorded at least every 30
minutes.
An automatic pit level device shall be installed and operational, at all times, on all mud
pits and on the trip tank. A pit volume recorder shall be continuously working on the rig
floor and on the Mud Logging Unit.
Any change in mud volume shall be immediately notified to the Driller and to the Mud
Logging Engineer. The Driller shall be constantly aware of the causes of any pit level
fluctuation.
Gas detectors shall be operational at all times.
The degasser shall be used whenever gas presence in the mud is indicated by the gas
detector.
Special care shall be given to the suction and discharge of the degasser to assure
maximum equipment reliability.
The Drilling Contractor may be requested to assign a person to monitor and control the
shale shaker area during all times that hole conditions demand.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
2)
6.4.
66 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
1)
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
If H2S is present safety precautions will be adopted as specified in (STAP-P-1-M-6035

E).
A ventilation room that provides at least one complete air change cycle every two
minutes will be installed in the mud pit room.
DRILLING WITH OIL-BASED MUD

The following issues should be considered when drilling with oil base muds:
a)
To avoid pollution, precautions shall be in place (drains from the rig floor and
shale shakers, cuttings treatment, etc.) in order to avoid environmental spillage.
b)
The safety of the crew shall always be paramount to prevent oil mud/skin contact
and accidents such as tripping, falling, hand crushing, etc.
c)
Maintain the cleanliness of the rig.
d)
Oil resistant equipment (various pack-off, seals on mud pits, etc.) must be used.
e)
Control of air quality in the pits and shale shakers room is a main concern when
oil base mud is used and the capacity of the ventilation system should be at least
one complete air change every minute.
f)
For fire control, the ventilation system shall keep the air/gas mixture below the
combustible limit, however in case of fire, the system shall be automatically shut
down as the blowers would feed the fire with fresh air
g)
Well control is affected by the use of oil based mud as it can create hazards
while handling drilling gas and gas kicks. Since a gas influx may dissolve
completely into the drilling fluid, small influxes of gas are more difficult to detect.
Gas expansion and pit gain do not occur as the influx is circulated toward the
surface. Detection may be delayed until the influx is only a few hundred feet from
the surface when the well suddenly starts to flow. Usually there is little time for
the rig crew to react to divert the flow. If this occurs, large volumes of mud and
gas may be unloaded onto the rig floor and up into the derrick.
h)
Since there is no equipment or equipment arrangement to take care of the

undetected gas influx as described in g) above, the problem of gas influx has to
be overcome by careful planning.
i)
The Drilling Contractor and the Company shall prepare and agree on a set of
specific rules and procedures.
j)
The basic guidelines when drilling with oil based muds are the following:
When drilling or coring known gas formations, be aware of potential for gas
break out and sudden unloading.
When back on bottom after tripping with gas formations exposed to the
open hole, be alert to sudden unloading of the hole as bottoms up near
surface.
A suspected but not detected influx shall be circulated to a predetermined
distance below the BOP stack (e.g., 500ft), the annular or upper pipe rams
will then be closed and bottoms up circulated out through the choke, under
control to the mud/gas separator.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
67 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
6.5.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
MINIMUM STOCK REQUIREMENTS

a)
Minimum stock requirements for mud weighting materials, chemicals, pipe

freeing agent, dispersant, lost circulation material, cement, kill and reserve mud
on the rig, depends on the well pressure prognosis, severity of potential drilling
problems and rig load capacity.
b)
The minimum barite stock shall be 100t. When overpressurised formations are
anticipated, barite stock shall be based on expected formation pressure
gradients, on the actual mud weight and on the volume of the active drilling fluid
in the system.
c)
The minimum cement stock shall be 100t. or at least enough to prepare 200m of
cement plug.
d)
A minimum volume of 70m of kill mud at 1.4kg/l shall be stocked while drilling
surface hole without a BOP stack installed.
e)
After nippling up a BOP stack, minimum requirements for kill mud cannot be
specified. The volume and density of kill mud shall be adjusted to the well
pressure prognosis and pit volumes available on the rig.
f)
Properties of reserve and kill mud should be checked and maintained daily and
recorded the mud report.
g)
In addition, the following material is recommended to be available onsite for

contingencies:
A stock of diesel oil, enough to guarantee five day of operations.

Pipe freeing agent. The quantity shall be sufficient to prepare two pills, the
volume of each one shall be two times the capacity of the annulus open
hole/BHA.
20 drums of dispersant.
Mica (fine, medium and coarse)-1.5t of each.
3t of Wall Nut.
Viscosifier for salt water (i.e. Biopolymer): the quantity shall be sufficient to
prepare 200m3.
The inventory of materials on the rig should be reviewed daily and replenishment arranged
immediately when stock levels approach the specified minimum requirement. With regard to
barite, cement and diesel oil, should the stocks fall below the minimum requirement, drilling
operations shall be suspended.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
IDENTIFICATION CODE
PAGE
68 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
7.
TRIPPING AND FILL-UP PROCEDURES
7.1.
GENERAL PROCEDURES
1)
2)
The Company Drilling and Completion Supervisor shall be present on the rig floor at
the beginning of every trip to check for fill-up.
Before the start of tripping out of the hole with drill pipe, the following criteria must be
followed, unless authorised by Company Drilling and Completion Manager/Drilling
Superintendent:
Bottoms up must be circulated.
No loss of circulation must be recorded.
No indication of on influx.
The mud density going into and coming out of the hole shall not differ more than
24g/l (0.2ppg).
3)
A flow check shall be taken at the following points:
Immediately above off bottom.
At the lowest casing shoe (regardless of the fill-up status).
4)
Prior to the start of tripping out, make sure that mud is conditioned in order to have the
minimum gel strength value within the desired values.
Before each trip, the rotary slips shall be inspected for worn or broken inserts and any
replacements made. Replacement inserts should be available on the rig at all times.
Prior to pulling out of hole, the drill pipe should be slugged with a heavy pill. The
volume and density of the pill should be determined by Company Drilling and
Completion Supervisor based on the following factors:
Density of mud in the hole.
Mud rheology.
Capacity of the drill pipe.
Hole depth.
5)
6)
As a general rule, it is preferable to pump a small volume pill of high density than a
large volume pill of low density.
Under the following circumstances, the use of slug pill should be avoided:
Shallow hole.
Possibility of damaging the reservoir with weighting agent.
When an increase in mud weight should be avoided in order to prevent mud
losses and/or fracturing the formation.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
69 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
The following formula is often used to calculate the pill's volume.

Volume =
Drop x Mud Weight x DP Capacity

Mud Weight of Pill Mud Weight
where:
Volume is in BBL.
Drop is in ft and represents the desired draw down in the string.
Mud Weight is in PPG.
DP Capacity is in BBL/ft.
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
The Wiper rubber should be used when pulling or running the drill pipe to prevent any
objects falling into the hole. Do not install the wiper rubber while tripping out the first 10
stands in order to observe the fluid level.
In an area where formations contain (or are suspected to contain) hydrogen sulphide
or other toxic gas, air breathing apparatus should be worn to observe the well at the
bell nipple.
Always use the trip tank (in and out) and accurately record volumes to make sure the
hole is taking/giving the proper amount of fluid. If any discrepancy is observed, the
Driller shall immediately inform the Tool Pusher and Company Drilling and Completion
Supervisor.
As a general rule, if the hole fails to take enough mud, run the drill string to bottom and
circulate bottoms up.
In case of trip tank failure, an alternative will be to use a mud pump. In this case the
annulus will be filled with mud every 5 stands of pipe. Volumes will be monitored by
isolating the suction tank and closely monitoring fluid volumes. A visual check of the
annulus should ensure the mud level is dropping normally while pulling pipe.
The trip (or fill-up) sheet shall be filled in on the rig floor while tripping. The Driller shall
submit the trip sheet to the Company Drilling and Completion Supervisor at the end of
the trip or when requested.
If drill pipe is pulled wet, the mud has to be returned to the hole. Drain the Mud Saver
Bucket into the bell nipple.
A suitable safety valve, threaded (or with proper connections) to fit each pipe
connection included in the string, must be on the rig floor, in the open position ready
for use with proper fittings and handling devices. The closing/opening wrench must be
readily available for immediate use.
Any time a trip is interrupted, the hand tight installation of a safety valve is
recommended.
The drill pipe shall be pulled and run in the hole at such rate as to prevent swabbing
and pressure surges.
If possible, and if required by hole conditions, rotate the string when tripping to prevent
sticking while standing back pipe.
Use a pipe spinner or chain under the following circumstances when:
Tripping out a core barrel.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)
24)
25)
26)
27)
70 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Caving problems are encountered.

Tripping out from thief zones.
Tripping out from kick off zones (deviated holes, side-track, etc.).
Pulling out running tools.
Pulling string with an expected washout.
Pulling a broken string or fish.
The standard break out technique should be adopted in order to have all the tool joints
in the drill string broken out and doped alternatively.
No welding/strapping shall be allowed on the BHA unless expressly required by the
Company Drilling and Completion Supervisor for special reasons taking into
consideration the particular tools and their position in the BHA.
In case of drag when tripping out, do not exceed a reasonable value of overpull usually
1
/3 of string weight. This value should be adjusted to hole conditions, drill string design
and stabilisation and hole profile (vertical, side-track, directional). If necessary, work
the pipe (i.e. rotate) and/or install a Kelly and circulate to pass through the tight spot.
If drag is encountered when tripping in, install the Kelly and wash/ream the free zone.
Never attempt to push the bit through a ledge. No weight should be placed on the bit
during reaming. Torque, and sometimes pressure, are the only guide parameters to
perform this operation. While reaming pay attention in order to avoid making a new
hole.
Always record depths and overpulls of troublesome zones on the IADC and Company
Daily Drilling Reports.
Torque all joints to the API recommended value.
A short trip shall be performed before tripping out of overpressurised zones, unless
advised otherwise by the Company Drilling Manager and/or Superintendent.
The following procedure shall be carried out for a short trip:
a)
Pull 5 to 10 stands at normal speed, making sure the hole is taking the proper
amount of mud (no swabbing). Use the trip tank accurately.
b)
Run back to bottom.
c)
Perform a flow check on the bottom.
d)
Circulate and check bottoms up.
e)
If an influx is detected, increase the mud weight as necessary.
f)
A second short trip may be required.
Gauge accurately the residual diameter of the bit and stabilisers in order to plan a
subsequent reaming operation or change the drilling string design if a PDC or diamond
bit is scheduled. It is recommended to use a three point gauge ring if available.
The blind or shear rams must be closed every time tools are out of the hole.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
71 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
7.2.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
TRIPPING WITH A TOP DRIVE

When using a top drive, the following points should be noted:
7.3.
a)
Tripping is still handled in the conventional manner. The link tilt feature can be used to
tilt the elevator to the derrick man, enhancing his ability to latch it around the pipe thus
improving trip times.
b)
The link tilt has an intermediate stop which is adjustable to set the elevator at a
convenient working distance from the monkey board. The intermediate stop is tilted out
of the way to allow the elevator to reach the mouse hole.
c)
The elevators may be positioned in any direction by unlocking the rotation lock and
rotating the pipe handler.
d)
The elevators will return to their original position if rotated by the drill string.
e)
If a tight spot or key seat is encountered while tripping out the hole, the drilling motor
may be spun into the stand at any height in the derrick and circulation and/or rotation
established immediately to work the pipe through the tight spot.
FLOW CHECKS
When required, a flow check shall be performed as follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
During a trip, remove the wiper rubber.

Pick up the drill string until the tool joint is in correct position above the rotary table and
the BOP can be closed properly on the pipe body.
Stop the mud pumps (piston and supercharged type).
Line up to the trip tank. Observe the trip tank indicator and visually check for flow
observing the mud level in the annulus.
The duration of the test shall be at least 15 minutes or whatever time is necessary to
determine without any doubt that the well is static or flowing. Nevertheless, keep the
time the drill string is not circulating as short as possible.
If flow is observed, close the BOP and begin well control procedures. Otherwise,
resume drilling operations.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
IDENTIFICATION CODE
PAGE
72 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
8.
DRILLING STRING DESIGN/STABILISATION
8.1.
STRAIGHT HOLE DRILLING

It has been confirmed through observation that a drilling bit will attempt to up move toward
o
an up dip in laminar formations with dips angles up to 40 .
A factor in consideration of this is the bending characteristics of the drill string. With no
weight on the bit, the only force acting on the bit is the result of the gravitational weight of the
portion of the string between the bit and the tangency point. The force caused by this weight
tends to bring the hole back towards vertical. When weight is applied, there is a bending of
the string and subsequently a force on the bit which tends to direct the hole away from the
vertical. The results of these two forces will either cause an increase in angle, decrease in
angle, or to remain at a constant angle. This theory is based on the assumption that the drill
string will lie on the low side of an inclined hole.
8.2.
DOG-LEG AND KEY SEAT PROBLEMS
8.2.1.
Drill Pipe Fatigue

If a programme is designed in such a way that drill pipe damage is avoided, while drilling the
hole, then the hole will be acceptable for conventional casing, tubing and production string
designs, as far as dog-leg severity is concerned.
A classic example of the severe dog-leg condition which produces fatigue failures in drill pipe
can be seen in figure 8.a. The stress at point B is greater than the stress at point A; but as
the pipe is rotated, point A moves from the inside of the bend to the outside and back again,
so that every fibre of the pipe undergoes both minimum tension and maximum tension every
rotation. Cyclic stress reversals of this nature cause fatigue failures in drill pipe, usually
within the first 2ft (0.6 m) of the body adjacent to the tool joint due to the abrupt change of
angle.
To avoid rapid fatigue failure of pipe, the rate of change of the hole angle must be controlled.
Suggested limits are given in figure 8.b. This graph is a plot of the tension in the pipe versus
1
change in hole angle in degrees per 100ft. This curve is designed for a 4 /2" 16.60lb/ft Grade
E drill pipe and represents the stress endurance limits of the drill pipe under various tensile
loads and in various rates of change in hole angle. If conditions fall to the left of this curve,
fatigue damage is avoided, but to the right, fatigue damage will build up rapidly and failure of
the pipe is likely.
It can be seen from this plot that with a dog-leg high in the hole with high tension in the pipe,
only a small change in angle can be tolerated. Conversely, if the dog-leg is close to total
depth, tension in the pipe will be low and a larger change in angle can be tolerated.
Note:
Refer to figure 8.c for the maximum safe dog-leg limits when using Grade
E drill pipe. If the stress endurance limit of the drill pipe is exceeded, an
expensive fishing job or a junked hole could occur.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
73 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
8.2.2.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Stuck Pipe
Sticking can occur by sloughing or heaving of the hole or also by extra large OD drill collars
into a key seat while tripping the drill string out of the hole.
8.2.3.
Logging
Logging tools and wire line can become stuck in key seats. The wall of the hole can also be
damaged, causing future hole problems.
8.2.4.
Running casing
Running casing through a dog-leg can cause serious problems. If the casing becomes stuck
in the dog-leg, it will not extend through the productive zone. This would make it necessary
to drill out the shoe and set a smaller size casing through the productive interval. Even if
running the casing to bottom through the dog-leg is successful, the casing could be severely
damaged, thereby preventing the running of production equipment inside the casing.
8.2.5.
Cementing
Dog-legs will force casing tightly against the wall of the hole, preventing a good cement bond
as no cement can circulate between the wall of the hole and the casing at this point.
8.2.6.
Casing Wear While Drilling

The lateral force of the drill pipe rotating against the casing in the dog-leg or dragging
through it while tripping, can cause substantial wear to the casing. This could cause drilling
problems and/or a possible serious blow-out.
8.2.7.
Production Problems
In rod pump completions rod wear and tubing leaks, associated with dog-legs, can cause
expensive remedial costs. It may be difficult to run packers and tools in and out of the well
without getting stuck because of distorted or collapsed casing.
It is obviously preferred to produce through straight tubing to avoid friction losses and
prevent turbulence.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
74 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Figure 8.A - Dog Leg and Key Seating
Figure 8.B - Endurance Limit For 16.60# Grade E Drill Pipe
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
75 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Figure 8.C - Maximum Safe Dog leg Limits

8.3.
HOLE ANGLE CONTROL

In order to reduce the possible causes of bit deviation and the problems associated with
crooked holes, There are two possible solutions, one using the pendulum and the other the
packed BHA concepts.
8.3.1.
Packed Hole Theory

A packed hole assembly is used to overcome crooked hole problems and the pendulum is
used only as a corrective measure to reduce angle when the maximum permissible deviation
has been reached. The packed hole assembly is sometimes referred to as the gun barrel
approach because a series of stabilisers is used in the hole already drilled to guide the bit
straight ahead.
The object is to select a bottom hole assembly to be run above the bit with the necessary
stiffness and wall contact tools to force the bit to drill in the general direction of the hole
already drilled. If the proper selection of drill collars and bottom hole tools is made, only
gradual changes in hole angle can develop. This should create a useful hole with a fullgauge and smooth bore free from dog-leg, key seats, offsets, spirals and ledges, thereby
making it possible to complete the well.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
76 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
8.3.2.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Pendulum Theory
The forces which act upon the bit can be resolved into:
8.4.
a)
The axial load supplied by the weight of the drill collars.
b)
The lateral force, the weight of the drill collar between the bit and the first point of
contact with the wall of the hole by the drill collar i.e. Pendulum force. This force is the
tendency of the unsupported length of drill collar to swing over against the low side of
the hole due to gravity. It is the only force that tends to bring the hole back towards
vertical.
c)
The reaction of the formation to these loads may be resolved into two forces, one
parallel to the axis of the hole and one perpendicular to the axis of the hole.
DESIGNING A PACKED HOLE ASSEMBLY

The following factors need to be considered when designing a packed hole assembly.
8.4.1.
Length Of Tool Assembly

It is important that wall contact assemblies provide sufficient length of contact to assure
alignment with the hole already drilled. Experience confirms that a single stabiliser just above
the bit generally acts as fulcrum or pivot point and will build angle because the lateral force
of the unstabilised collars above will cause the bit to push to one side as weight is applied.
Another stabilising point, for example, at 30ft (10m) above the bit will nullify some of the
fulcrum effect. With these two points, this assembly will stabilise the bit and remove some of
the hole angle-building tendency, but it would still not be considered a good packed hole
assembly.
As shown in figure 8.d, two points will contact and follow a curved line, but the addition of
one more point makes it impossible to follow a curve. Therefore, three or more stabilising
points are needed to form a packed hole assembly.
8.4.2.
Stiffness
Stiffness is probably the most misunderstood of all the issues to be considered about drill
collars and the realisation of the importance of diameter and that it is proportional to
stiffness, e.g. if a bar diameter is doubled its stiffness is increased sixteen fold.
table 8.a shows moments of inertia (I), which is proportional to stiffness, for the most popular
drill collars in various diameters.
Large diameter drill collars are the ultimate in stiffness, so it is important to select the
maximum diameter collars that can be safely run.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
77 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Three or more stabilising points make a packed bottom hole assembly.
Figure 8.D - Packed Hole Assembly Stabilising Points

OD (ins)
ID (ins)
I (ins4)
5"
2 /4"
29
6 /4"
1
6 /2"
74
86
100
13
115
13
198
13
2 /4"
2 /4"
6 /4"
2 /4"
7"
2 /16"
8"
2 /16"
9"
2 /16"
318
10"
3"
486
11"
3"
713
Table 8.A - Drill Collar Stiffness
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
78 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
8.4.3.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Clearance
The closer a stabiliser is to the bit, the more exacting the clearance requirements are. If, for
1
example, a /16" under-gauge from hole diameter is satisfactory just above the bit, then 60ft
1
above the bit, /8" clearance can be critical factor for a packed hole assembly.
8.4.4.
Wall Support and Length of Contact Tool

Bottom assembly must adequately contact the wall of the hole to stabilise the bit and
centralise the drill collars. The length of contact needed between the tool and the wall of the
hole will be determined by the formation. The surface area in contact must be sufficient to
prevent the stabilising tool from digging into the wall of the hole. If this should happen,
stabilisation would be lost and the hole would drift. If the formation is strong, hard and
uniform, a short narrow contact surface is adequate and will insure proper stabilisation.
On the other hand, if the formation is soft and unconsolidated, a long blade stabiliser may be
required. Hole enlargement in formations that erode quickly tends to reduce affective
alignment of the bottom hole assembly.
This problem can be reduced by controlling the annular velocity and mud properties.
8.5.
PACKED BOTTOM HOLE ASSEMBLIES

Proper design of a packed bottom hole assembly requires a knowledge of crooked hole
tendencies and the degree of drillability of the formations to be drilled in each particular area.
For basic design practices the following are considered pertinent parameters and are
defined as:
a)
Crooked Hole Drilling Tendencies
b)
Mild crooked hole

Medium crooked hole
Severe crooked hole.
Formation Firmness
Hard to medium hard formations

Abrasive
Non abrasive
Medium hard to soft formations.
figure 8.e shows three basic assemblies required to provide the necessary stiffness and
stabilisation for a packed hole assembly. A short drill collar is used between zone 1 and zone
2 to reduce the amount of deflection that might be caused by the drill collar weight. As a
general rule of thumb, the short drill collar length in feet is approximately equal to the hole
size in inches, plus or minus two feet. For example a short drill collar length of 6 to 10ft (23m) would be satisfactory in an 8 hole.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
79 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
* The short drill collar length is determined by the hole size

Hole size (inches) = Short DC (ft) +/- 2ft
Figure 8.E - Basic Packed BHAs
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
80 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
8.6.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
PENDULUM BOTTOM HOLE ASSEMBLIES

Because all packed assemblies will bend to some extent, however small the amount of
deflection, it is not possible to make a perfectly vertical hole. The rate of hole angle change
may be kept to a minimum for normal deviation but occasionally conditions will arise where
the total hole deviation must be restricted to closer tolerances.
When this condition occurs the pendulum technique is employed, however if it is anticipated
that a packed hole assembly will be required after reduction of the hole angle, the packed
pendulum technique is recommended.
The pendulum assembly is based on the principle that the only force available to straighten a
deviated hole is the weight of the drill collars between the point of tangency (stabiliser) and
the bit.
In the packed pendulum technique, a pendulum length of collars are slung below the regular
packed hole assembly in combination. When hole deviation has been dropped to an
acceptable limit, the pendulum collars are removed and the packed hole assembly is again
run above the bit. It is then only necessary to ream the length of the hole equal to the length
of the pendulum collars prior to resuming normal drilling.
If a vibration dampening device is used in the packed pendulum assembly, it should remain
in its original pick-up position during the pendulum operations. (Refer to figure 8.f).
Figure 8.F - Pendulum BHA
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
81 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
8.7.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
REDUCED BIT WEIGHT

By reducing the weight on the bit, the bending tendency of the drill string are changed and
the hole will be straighter.
One of the earliest techniques for straightening the hole was to reduce the weight on the bit
and speed up the rotary table. In recent years it has been found that this is not always the
best procedure because reducing the bit weight sacrifices considerable penetration rate.
Worse than this, it frequently causes dog-legs as illustrated in 8.7. Therefore as a point of
caution, the straightening of a hole by reducing bit weight should be done very gradually so
that the hole will tend to return to vertical without sharp bends and be much safer for future
drilling. A reduction of bit weight is usually required when changing from a packed hole
assembly to a pendulum or packed pendulum drilling operation.
Figure 8.G - Reduced Bit Weight
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
82 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
8.8.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
DRILL STRING DESIGN

The normal drill string design practice aim is to avoid abrupt changes in component cross
sectional areas.
Abrupt changes can lead to concentrations in bending stresses which in turn can lead to a
twist off (Refer to figure 8.h).
The ratio I/C between the moment of inertia (I) and radius (C) of the pipe is directly related to
the resistance to bending (Refer to Section 8.4.2). The following are used to determine the
section modulus I/C:
I
= Moment of inertia
4
= /64 x (OD - ID )
C
= Radius of the tube

= OD/2
At a crossover from one tubular size to another size, the ratio (I/C large pipe)/(I/C small pipe)
should be less than 5.5 for soft formations and less than 3.5 for hard formations.
table 8.b shows the ratio (I/C) for the most common sizes of drill pipes, HW drill pipes and
drill collars.
table 8.c illustrates some possible drill strings and their acceptable use.
Figure 8.H - Bending Moment
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
OD (ins)
1
3 /2
1
4 /8
3
4 /4
3
5 /4
3
5 /4
6
6
1
6 /4
1
6 /4
1
6 /2
1
6 /2
3
6 /4
3
6 /4
7
1
7 /4
3
7 /4
3
7 /4
8
8
1
8 /4
1
8 /4
1
8 /2
9
1
9 /2
10
1
11 /4
12
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
83 OF 234
REVISION
Drill Collar
ID (ins)
1
1 /2
2
1
2 /4
1
2 /4
3
21 /16
1
2 /4
3
2 /16
1
2 /4
3
2 /16
1
2 /4
3
2 /16
1
2 /4
3
2 /16
3
2 /16
3
2 /16
3
2 /16
3
3
2 /16
3
3
2 /16
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
STAP-P-1-M-6140
OD (ins)
3
2 /8
3
2 /8
7
2 /8
7
2 /8
1
3 /2
1
3 /2
1
3 /2
4
4
1
4 /2
1
4 /2
1
4 /2
5
5
5
1
5 /2
1
5 /2
1
5 /2
5
6 /8
Drill Pipe
ID (ins)
WT
2
4.85
1.815
6.65
2.441
6.85
2.151
10.40
3
9.50
2.764
13.30
2.602
15.50
3.476
11.85
3.340
14.00
3.958
13.75
3.826
16.60
3.640
20.00
4.408
16.25
4.276
19.50
4.000
25.60
4.892
19.20
4.778
21.90
4.670
24.70
5.965
25.20
I/C
4.1
6.6
9.8
18.3
17.6
20.8
20.2
23.3
22.7
26.7
26.2
30.1
29.6
32.7
37.5
44.6
44.4
49.5
49.3
55.9
54.2
59.2
71.0
83.8
97.2
138.8
154.5
I/C
0.7
0.9
1.1
1.6
2.0
2.6
2.9
2.7
3.2
3.6
4.3
5.1
4.9
5.7
7.3
6.1
7.1
7.8
9.8
Extra Weight Pipe

OD (ins)
1
4 /2
5
ID (ins)
13
2 /16
3
1
=(Moment of Inertia)
= Radius of the Tube in inches
Ratio=
WT
32.0
42.6
4
= ( /64) x (OD - ID ) x 3.142
I / CDrillCollars
I / CDrillPipes
Table 8.B - I/C Ratios for standard Tubulars
I/C
7.7
10.7
ARPO
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Hole Size
(ins)
Drill Collar/Drill Pipe

(ins)
I/C Ratio
83.8
1.5
DC 8 /4 x 21 /16
55.9
9.8
DP 5 x 19.5lbs/ft
5.7
Not
DC 9 /2 x 3
83.8
1.5
Recommended
55.9
7.1
DP 5 /2 x 19,5lbs/ft
7.8
1.4
DP 5x 19.5lbs/ft
5.7
83.8
1.5
OK for
DC 8 /4 x 2 /16
55.9
5.2
SOFT
HWDP 5 x 42.6lbs/ft
10.7
1.9
Formations
DP 5 x 19.5lbs/ft
5.7
1
1
13
DC 8 /4 x 2 /16
1
17 /2
I/C
DC 9 /2 x 3
84 OF 234
DC 9 /2 x 3
1
13
DC 9 /2 x 3
Remarks
83.8
1.5
/16
55.9
2.5
OK For HARD
13
DC 6 /4 x 2 /16
22.7
1.9
Formations
DP 5 x 19.5lbs/ft
5.7
13
DC8 /4 2
1
Note: For every hard formations, add HWDP

1
12 /4
DC9 /2 x 3
83.8
1.5
13
55.9
2.5
OK For HARD
13
DC 6 /4 x 2 /16
22.7
3.9
Formations
DP 5 x 19.5lbs/ft
5.7
DC 8 /4 x 2 /16
Note: For every hard formations, add HWDP

1
12 /4
DC9 /2 x 3
83.8
1.5
DC 8 /4 x 2 /16
55.9
5.2
OK For SOFT
HWDP 5 x 42.6lbs/ft
10.7
1.9
Formations
DP 5 x 19.5 lbs/ft
5.7
8 /2
13
13
DC 6 /4 x 2 /16
22.7
DP 5 x 19.5lbs/ft
5.7
13
DC 6 /4 x 2 /16
22.7
HWDP 5 x 42.6lbs/ft
10.7
DP 5 x 19.5lbs/ft
5.7
Table 8.C - Drill String Acceptability
Not
3.9
Recommended
Recommended
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
85 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
8.9.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
BOTTOM HOLE ASSEMBLY BUCKLING

Without weight on the bit, a drill string is straight if the hole is straight. With a sufficient small
weight applied on the bit, the string will remain straight. As the weight is increased, a critical
value of weight is reached and the drill string will buckle and contact the wall of the hole. If
the weight on the bit is further increased, a new critical value is reached at which the drill
string buckles a second time. This is designated as buckling of the second order. With still
higher weights on the bit, buckling of the third and higher orders occur.
When a buckled string is rotated, stresses in the outside fibres of the tubulars develop.
These stresses increase in accordance with the diameter of the hole and results in fatigue
failure of the string. As soon as a drill string buckles in a straight hole, the bit is no longer
vertical and a perfectly vertical hole cannot be maintained. Therefore, in the design of BHAs,
it is important to determine the critical values of weight on bit at which buckling occurs.
The critical weight on bit of the first order (W cr1) and second order (W cr2) are given by the
following equations:
W cr1 = 1.94 x m x p
W cr2 = 3.75 x m x p
Where:
m
Length of one dimensionless unit, in metres
Weight in mud per unit of length of the pipe, in kg/m
The dimensionless unit m is a function of Young's modulus for steel, moment of inertia of
the pipe cross section and weight in mud per unit of length of the pipe. The values of m for
various sizes of drill collar are plotted in figure 8.i.
Under normal conditions, some buckling of the drill string is inevitable, therefore stiffer
collars and stabiliser should be used for control of the hole angle.
ARPO
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
86 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
m
28
11" * 3"
9 1/2" * 3"
8 1/4" * 3"
26
8 1/4" * 2 13/16"
8" * 3"
8" * 2 13/16"
24
7 1/2" * 2 13/16"
22
20
18
1,0
1,2
1,4
1,6
Mud Weight (kg/l)
1,8
2,0
2,2
m
21
6 3/4" * 2 13/16"
20
6 1/2" * 2 13/16"
6 3/4" * 2 1/4"
6 1/2" * 2 1/4"
19
6" * 2 13/16"
6" * 2 1/4"
18
4 3/4" * 2 1/4"
17
16
15
14
1,0
1,2
1,4
1,6
1,8
2,0
2,2
Mud Weight (kg/l)
Figure 8.I - Dimensionless Unit (m) for Various Sizes of DC
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
87 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
8.10.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
SUMMARY RECOMMENDATIONS FOR STABILISATION

a)
For the vertical section of the hole the purpose of stabilisation, more than any other
factor, is to maintain the drift angle as close as possible to zero and, if applicable, to
prevent wall sticking.
b)
For deviated holes, the stabiliser positions in the BHA depend entirely on directional
drilling requirements and as a rule determined by the Directional Engineer.
c)
All stabilisers shall be the integral type and machined from a single block of material
or the integral sleeve type fitted by head or hydraulic pressure (not threaded).
d)
The spiral profile of blades, for both string and near bit type stabiliser, shall be the
right hand type.
e)
All stabilisers for hole size up to 12 /4 must be the tight type in order to assure a
1
complete (360) contact with the borehole. All stabilisers for hole size over 12 /4" must
be open type but not less than 210.
f)
The maximum allowed diameter in consideration to the grooves shall be the outside
diameter of the fishing neck.
g)
All stabilisers should have a fishing neck with the same OD as the drill collars and a
length not shorter than 20 for stabilisers up to 6 hole size and 26 for larger hole size
stabilisers.
h)
All stabilisers smaller than 15" OD shall have three blades. Stabilisers larger than 15"
shall have four blades as standard.
i)
Stabilisers (and subs, etc.) should be demagnetised after a magnetic particle

inspection.
j)
The maximum allowable reduction value on outside diameter of stabilisers should be

according to the attached tables .
k)
Tungsten carbide smooth surface solid body integral blade stabilisers are preferred.
1
Integral sleeve stabilisers may also be used in large hole sizes above 12 /4", mainly as
the near bit stabiliser, in order to position the stabilisation point right on top of the bit.
l)
The maximum allowable wear of the stabiliser blades should be in accordance with the
previous point. If such a limit is reached at any point, the stabiliser has to be replaced.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
Body OD
4 /32
5 /4
7
5 /8
21
21
4 /32
21
Rotary
Conns
Blade OD
String
Type
NC 38
5 /32
NC 38
NC 38
19
23
5 /32
23
4 /32
8 /8
6 /8
NC 46
8 /16
6 /8
NC 46
6 /8 R
8 /2
10
26
12
10
2 /2
26
12
10
12
12 /64
26
12
10
15 /4
15 /4
26
12
10
26
12
10
26
12
10
26
12
10
26
12
10
26
12
10
26
12
10
26
12
10
26
12
10
15 /4
17 /4
17 /16
17 /4
22 /16
11
22 /4
11
22 /16
22 /4
25 /16
11
25 /4
11
25 /16
11
7 /8 R
10 /8
8 /8 R
23
9 /8
7 /8 R
23
10 /8
8 /8 R
26
9 /8
7 /8 R
10 /8
12
17 /2
28
20
13
5 /32
8 /8 R
12 /64
10 /8
10 /8
10
12
7 /8 R
26
12
2 /2
20
27
5 /32
10
9 /8
12
16
10
26
7 /8 R
12
21
9 /8
9 /8
20
23
8 /64
12 /4
19
5 /32
Length of Min Width

Box Bit
of Blades
17 /2
Length of
Pin End
8 /16
16
Length of
Fishing
Neck
8 /64
7 /8
5 /32
Blade OD
Near Bit
Type
12 /4
88 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Hole
Size
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
8 /8 R
8 /8 R
15 /4
17 /4
27 /16
25 /4
27 /4
Main dimensions of string and near bit type stabilisers are in ins.
Table 8.D - Acceptable Dimensions For Used String And Near Bit Stabilisers
The maximum overall length, for string type stabilisers only, must be as follows:
75" for 5 /4" to 6" hole size stabilisers

3
1
85" for 8 /8" to 12 /4" hole size stabilisers
100" for 16" to 28" hole size stabilisers.
1
1
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
Body OD
21
Rotary
Conn.
Blade OD
String Type
NC 38
5 /32
Length
Pin End
Minimum Width
of Blades
27
20
12
8 /16
26
12
2 /2
12
26
12
12
26
12
15 /4
26
12
26
12
4 /32
6 /8
NC 46
6 /8 R
7 /8
12 /4
12 /4
9 /8
16
7 /8 R
9 /8
7 /8 R
17 /2
9 /8
Length of
Fishing Neck
6
8 /2
89 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Hole Size
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
7 /8 R
17 /16
Main dimensions of string and near bit type stabilisers are in ins.
Table 8.E - Acceptable Dimensions For Used String And Near Bit Stabilisers
The maximum overall length must be as follows:
8.11.
75" for 6" hole size stabilisers

1
1
85" for 8 /2" to 12 /4" hole size stabilisers
1
100" for 16" to 17 /2" hole size stabilisers.
OPERATING LIMITS OF DRILL PIPE

The design of the drill string for static tensile loads requires sufficient strength in drill pipe to
support the submerged weight of drill pipe and drill collar below. The submerged load (P)
hanging below any section of drill pipe can be calculated as follow:
P= (L dp x Wdp )+(L c x Wc ) xK b
where:
Ldp
Lc
Length of drill pipe in feet
Length of drill collar in feet
W dp
Weight per foot of drill pipe in air
Wc
Weight per foot of drill collar in air
Kb
Buoyancy factor
The difference between the maximum allowable tension and the calculated load represents
the Margin of Over Pull (MOP):
MOP = (Pt x 0.9) - P
where:
Pt
0.9
Theoretical tension load from table
Design factor
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
90 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
The minimum recommended value of MOP is 60,000lbs (27t) and it shall be calculated for
the topmost joint of each size, weight, grade and classification of drill pipe. The anticipated
total depth with next string run and expected mud weight should be considered when
calculating the MOP.
The overall drilling conditions (directional well, hole drag, likelihood of becoming stuck, etc.)
may require higher values of MOP. When the depth is reached where the MOP approaches
the minimum recommended value, stronger drill pipe shall be added to the string.
8.12.
GENERAL GUIDELINES
Packed hole assemblies shall generally be used unless otherwise dictated by hole
conditions.
Standard packed hole assembly should be:
Bit + Near Bit Stab + Short DC (7ft =2.5m) + String Stab + K Monel DC + String
Stab + 2 DC + String Stab.
A stabilised string can be used to drill out shoe-tracks after casing setting unless
there is so much cement left inside the casing to discourage such a procedure.
If the bottom hole assembly is different from the one previously used, run in the
hole with maximum care, monitoring the weight indicator closely. Any indication
of string dragging must be promptly detected. Tight zones must be reamed free
before proceeding with the trip.
Any change in the stabilisation from that specified in the drilling programme must
be authorised by the Company Drilling Office
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
IDENTIFICATION CODE
PAGE
91 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
9.
DIRECTIONAL DRILLING
Controlled Directional Drilling can be defined as the technique of intentionally deviating a well
bore so that, the bottom hole location or any intermediate portion of the hole, is positioned in
a predetermined target(s) area, that is located at a given horizontal and vertical distance
from the surface location of the well (refer to the Directional Drilling Manual).
Many new tools and techniques have been developed in recent years to enhance the
accuracy of this technique.
9.1.
TERMINOLOGY AND CONVENTIONS

True North:
The direction from any point on the earth's surface to the

geographic north pole which is fixed.
Magnetic North:
The direction from any point on the earth's surface to the

magnetic north pole.
Magnetic Declination:
The angle between True North and the direction shown by the
north pointer of a compass needle at the location being
considered, measured from True North. Magnetic declination
for a given location changes gradually with time, An annual
rate of change is applied to give the present declination. The
magnetic declination and rates of change are obtained from
detailed charts or computer program. To obtain the
geographic direction, the direction obtained from magnetic
surveys shall be corrected simply by adding or subtracting the
appropriate declination.
Direction:
Directions can be measured and given in three ways:
Azimuth, where the angle is measured from north in a

clockwise direction from 0 to 360 (for example: 252
AZ).
Quadrant Format (called Field Co-ordinate or Oil Field

Format), the direction is expressed as an angle E or W
of N or S (the 252 AZ becomes S72W).
Bearing Angle, the angle is measured from 0 to 180

East (positive) or West (negative) of North (108 W or 108).
The correction due to magnetic declination is the same for any
of the three formats.
Inclination (Inc) also
termed Drift:
The angle the centre line of the well bore makes with a vertical
axis below the well. By definition, straight holes have zero
angle of inclination. All inclination angles are positive.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
92 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Target:
A predetermined area of interest whose position is defined by

its horizontal and vertical distance from the surface location of
the well.
Well Path:
The path of the bore hole drilled by the bit.
Projected Well Path:
The path expected of the bit to follow beyond the end of the
well bore.
Station:
A survey data point. A station length is the measured footage

between stations. The well path is that provided by all of the
data points therefore a well path survey is all the data points
surveyed.
Survey Data
The inclination angle, the direction of the well bore is pointing

and the measured depth of the surveying instrument.
Build Up Rate (BUR):
The build-up rate should be kept as close as possible to the

designated well trajectory ensuring that the build-up neither
lags behind nor exceeds the projected well path. Large rates
of build-up result in increased torque and wear on drill pipe
and casing, and in the problems associated with accidentally
side tracking or formation of key seats. Insufficient build-up
rate will result in an increased final angle required to achieve
o
the objective; generally build-up rates of 1.5 to 3.0 /100ft are
normally used.
Dog Leg Severity

(DLS):
The rate of change of the combination of both inclination and

direction of a well path between data points. It is usually
expressed in degrees per 100ft or 30m interval drilled.
Tangent Section:
The section of the well starting from the end of build up and
where direction and inclination are maintained constant.
Horizontal
Displacement (or
Horizontal Departure):
The distance projected onto a horizontal plane from the origin

to the point under consideration.
Vertical Section:
The projection of the horizontal displacement onto a vertical

plane usually along the target direction.
Lead Angle:
When drilling with rotary drilling assemblies there is a

tendency for the hole to walk to the right. Turbine drilling
assemblies have the opposite tendency, that is walk to the
left. The lead is the angle to be applied to the project direction
at kick-off to correct the walking tendency of the drilling
assemblies.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
93 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
9.2.
CO-ORDINATE SYSTEMS
9.2.1.
Universal Transverse Of Mercator (UTM)
In the Transverse Mercator Projection the surface of the spheroid chosen to represent the
Earth is wrapped in a cylinder which touches the spheroid along a chosen meridian.
From the centre of the globe (Refer to figure 9.a), shapes on the surface of the spheroid are
transferred to the surface of the cylinder (A becomes A1 and B becomes B1). The cylinder is
then unwrapped giving a correct scale representation along the central meridian and an
increased scale away from it.
NORTH POLE
(AXIS)
CIRCLE OF CONTACT
A1
A
B1
B
Figure 9.A - Universal Transfer Of Mercator

As a Mercator projection becomes increasingly inaccurate as one moves away from the
chosen meridian, a series of reference meridians is used so that it is always possible to use
a map with the reference meridian close to the place of work.
The reference meridians used are 6 degrees apart providing 60 maps, called zones, to cover
the whole world. The zones are numbered 0 to 60 (from west to east) with zone 31 having
o
o
the 0 meridian (Greenwich) on the left and 6 E on the right.
o
Each zone is further sub-divided into grid sectors each one covering 8 latitude starting from
the equator. Grid sectors are identified by the zone number and by a letter ranging from C to
X (excluding I and O) from 80 South to 80 North. Identification of the sector is simply the
number and letter of the relevant area, i.e. 31U being the Southern North Sea (Refer to
figure 9.c).
The co-ordinates for each UTM grid sector are given in metres with the origins (i.e. the zero
value) at a line 500,000m West of the centre meridian to avoid negative values and at the
equator. The co-ordinates are given as Eastings and Northings.
ARPO
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
94 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Example
UTM co-ordinates of the rig:
410,261.0 E
6,833,184.2 N
The rig is 500,000 - 410,261m west of the central meridian and 6,833,184.2m north of the
equator.
The bearing between any two points in the same grid sector is referenced to Grid North
which is the direction of a straight line running from top to bottom of the map.
Convergence is the angle a (Refer to figure 9.b) between the Geographic North and the
Grid North for the location being considered measured from Geographic North. In the
northern hemisphere the convergence is positive for locations east of central meridian and
negative for locations west of central meridian. The opposite applies for the southern
hemisphere.
N
G
True North
NORTH (CENTRAL MERIDIAN)
a
EAST
EQUATOR LINE
WEST
+
CENTRAL MERIDIAN
SOUTH
Figure 9.B - Convergence Angle

9.2.2.
Geographical Co-ordinates
Generally rig and target co-ordinates are given in either UTM and/or geographical coordinates.
Geographical co-ordinates are expressed in degrees, minutes and seconds for Latitude and
Longitude. Each degree is subdivided into 60 minutes and each minute further subdivided
into 60 seconds (Refer to figure 9.c).
Example
Rig location:
3 36'
01.0" E Longitude
40 43'
06.5" N Latitude
For the purpose of calculations degrees, minutes and seconds are often converted into
decimal degrees. This is done by dividing the minutes by 60 and the seconds by 3,600 so
that 3 36' 01" becomes:
3 + 36/60 + 1/3600 = 3,600.278
ARPO
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
95 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
80
80
60
0
5
10
15
80
20
25
30
35
40
45
80
50
55
THE METHOD OF ZONE NUMBERING ACCORDING TO THE UTM SYSTEM ESCH ZONE IS 6
LONGITUDE IN WIDTH AND EXTENDS FROM 80 NORTH TO 80 SOUTH
27
28
29
30 31
32
33
34 35
36
37 38
39
40
41
42
64
V
56
U
31 U
48
T
40
S
32
R
24
Q
16
P
8
N
DEGREE
-8
-24 -18 -12 -6
12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72
Figure 9.C - Grid Sectors
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
96 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
9.3.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
RIG/TARGET LOCATIONS AND HORIZONTAL DISPLACEMENT

The first step in planning a well, starts with the data defining the rig and target locations,
generally in UTM or geographical co-ordinates. With these data the horizontal displacement
and direction to the target can be calculated.
If the data supplied for the rig and target location are in geographical co-ordinates these
must first be converted to UTM data.
9.3.1.
Horizontal Displacement
Using UTM co-ordinates (Refer to Figure), displacement and direction can be determined
with trigonometry as shown in the following example.
UTM co-ordinates of rig:
410,261.0 E 6,833,184.2 N
UTM co-ordinates of target:
412,165.0 E 6,834,846.0 N
Absolute difference in Eastings:
1,904.0m
Absolute difference in Northings:
1,661.8m
1904,0 m
1661,8 m
TARGET
48,9
H D 2527,21 m
RIG
Figure 9.D - Example Calculation Of Horizontal Displacement
The origin used may correspond to wellhead or slot in a template.
The horizontal displacement (HD) to the target is thus:
HD = (1661.82 + 1904.02) = 2527.21m
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
97 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
9.3.2.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Target Direction
The bearing to the target is:
9.3.3.
= tan (1,904.0 : 1,661.8) = 48.90 or N 48.90 E
Convergence
The target co-ordinates and bearing, as calculated above , are relative to the Grid North.
Since survey data make reference to the Geographic North (also called True North), the
convergence must be applied to the target co-ordinates and bearing to present them relative
to the Geographic North.
Taking convergence as being 1.45 in this example (Refer to figure 9.e), it is necessary to
rotate the target location about the origin of the well by -1.45 to place it in its relative
position to True North.
True North
GRID NORTH
-1,45
Grid
Convergence
NEW TARGET
Target
Grid North
Est
RIG
Fig. (a)
Fig. (b)
EST
Figure 9.E - Example Grid Convergence

In the previous example the bearing of the target with respect to Grid North was 48,90 or N
48.90 E. Then the target bearing relative to the True North is:
48.90 - 1.45 = 47.45 or N 47.45 E
The horizontal displacement remains the same but its co-ordinates change. The True North
co-ordinates of the target are calculated with trigonometry as follow:
Eastings = 2,527.21 sin 47.45 = 1,861.76
Northings = 2,527.21 cos 47.45 = 1,708.98
ARPO
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
9.4.
98 OF 234
HIGH SIDE OF THE HOLE AND TOOL FACE

The high side is the top of the hole viewed along the bore hole axis. Assuming the hole has
an inclination, the low side is the path, that a small, heavy ball would follow if it is rolled
slowly down the well (Refer to figure 9.f).
HIGH SIDE
HIGH SIDE
ROLLING BALL
LEFT
RIGHT
a
ROLLING BALL
LOW SIDE
LOW SIDE
VERTICAL
Figure 9.F - Definitions of Inclined Hole

During a kick off or correction run, the measurement of greatest value is tool facing, since it
indicates the orientation of the bent sub. When a MWD or steering tool is used to control the
deviation, tool face is referred to the high side of the hole when sufficient inclination exists
o
o
(over 5 ) or to magnetic North for low inclinations (up to 5 ). The gravity tool face angle
(GTF) is the projection onto a plane perpendicular to the hole axis of the angle between high
side of the hole and tool face.
The magnetic tool face angle (MTF) is the projection onto horizontal plane of the angle
between magnetic North and tool face(Refer to figure 9.g)
MAGNETIC NORTH
45
HIGH SIDE
TOOL FACE
TOOLFACE
LEFT
RIGHT
LOW SIDE
Steering the mudmotor by means of magnetic Steering the mudmotor by means of gravity
toolface bit and mud motor, trying to kick off in toolface bit and mud motor, trying to build
the direction of 45 magnetic azimuth
angle and turn well to the right
Figure 9.G - Magnetic Tool Face
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
99 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
9.4.1.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Magnetic Surveys
Length Of Non Magnetic Drill Collar
Magnetic instruments must be run inside a sufficient length of non-magnetic drill collars
(NMDC or Monel Collar) made of special nickel alloy to allow the instrument to respond to
the earth's magnetic field, by isolating it from the magnetic influence of the drill string.
The required length of NMDC is determined by taking into account the following factors:
The geographical area of operations. Since the earth's horizontal magnetic

intensity varies geographically, a zone selection map is used to determine which
set of empirical data should be used for a given area.
The proportion of steel drilling tools below the NMDC.
The direction and inclination of the well.
The Directional Drilling Contractor shall provide updated indication of magnetic intensity
related to the area of operation.
Compass spacing is generally recommended to be at or below the centre of the nonmagnetic collars.
Magnetic Single Shot Surveys
Prior to use, the instrument should be thoroughly checked out and tested to ensure it is in
good working condition. After loading, the timer is set and synchronised with a watch on the
surface.
o
The speed of the falling instrument is approximately 1,000ft per min for inclinations up to 40
o
and 800 ft per minute for inclinations over 40 . A safety margin of 5 mins shall be added to
the calculated running time. Mud weight and viscosity are important factors to be considered,
as are drill string restricted internal diameters.
o
For high inclinations (over 60 ) sinker bars should be used and the survey barrel may need
to be pumped down. The mud pump rate should be very low, giving just sufficient pressure
to break circulation. The drill string may be rotated slowly (not however, if running the survey
on wireline) and reciprocated to prevent sticking and assist the survey tool in reaching
bottom.
Drill pipe movement and pumping (if used) should be continued until a minute or so before
the timer is due to operate..
If run on wireline, it should be taken into account the time the instrument generally takes
longer to assemble and to run. Sandlines are quicker to run but can cause higher wear on
drill pipe protective linings. Whichever wireline is used, thread protectors should be installed
on the tool joint.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
100 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Magnetic Multishot Surveys

Magnetic multishot surveys are generally run prior to running casing as a check on the single
shot surveys taken while drilling. This survey may be run either as an inrun or running outrun
survey, although it is generally run on the outrun wiper trip before casing. This gives an
opportunity for the instrument to be retrieved at the casing shoe and checked whilst the trip
back to bottom is being made. A second opportunity is then available if necessary.
As the name implies, the magnetic multishot provides a series of single shot surveys. The
camera of the instrument, instead of carrying one single shot disc, contains a length of
photographic film. The film is exposed and advanced continuously, at a set time interval,
from the time the instrument is started until stopped. The interval between exposure is
generally 20sec but it is altered on some instruments.
The survey is normally made by dropping the instrument into the drill string and allowing it to
get to bottom before pumping the slug and commencing the trip out of the hole.
As the drill string becomes stationary in the slips after each stand is broken off, the time
since starting the instrument is recorded together with the number of stands out of hole. This
enables the survey picture to be correlated to instrument depth. With an instrument set on a
twenty second sample rate, good practice is to ensure there are a minimum of two surveys
taken at each depth by remaining stationary.
Steering Tool (with mud motor)
Steering tools use a system of magnetometers and accelerometers to measure the Earth's
magnetic field and gravity in order to determine inclination and direction.
The tool is run on a conductor wireline which provides power for the sensors and returns the
signal to the surface computer where it is decoded and relayed to the rig floor read out.
The tool may be operated on one of two modes displaying tool face with respect to North
(Magnetic Tool Face) or relative to the high side of the hole (Gravity Tool Face). The
magnetic tool face mode is used in vertical or near vertical wells for kick off in the desired
o
direction. As the inclination is increased above about 5 , the tool is switched to gravity tool
face.
The advantages of steering tools over single shot orientation are in the continual read-out of
the tool face whilst drilling and in saving time in situations where orientation problems may
require repeated single shot surveys.
One of the drawbacks of the system is the time required to pull the tool out of hole for
making pipe connections.
The steering tool system is used only in specific situations, i.e. KOP in a high temperature
zone.
When a motor is used for kick off or correction runs (operations not requiring rotation of the
drill string), a side entry sub may be used. This sub prevents the need to pull the tool to
make connections. The wireline passes through the entry sub enabling the drill pipe to be
added to the string in the normal manner.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
101 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Measurement While Drilling (MWD)

Measurement While Drilling is a technique which takes various downhole measurements and
transmitting these data to the surface for decoding and display. The most common
transmission media is mud pulse telemetry in which the flowing column of drilling mud is
modulated periodically by some mechanical means within the downhole assembly. The
intermittent pressure pulses are transmitted from downhole to the surface where they are
detected by a pressure transducer mounted in the standpipe. The transducer converts the
mud pulses into electrical signal that is then transmitted to the surface computer. The
computer decodes and displays this transmitted information.
There are three distinct types of MWD transmission systems currently available, all using
mud column as their transmission medium:
The positive system uses a plunger type valve that momentarily obstructs mud
flow thus creating a positive, transient pressure pulse.
The negative pulse system utilises a valve that momentarily vents a portion of
the mud flow to the borehole annulus, resulting in a negative, transient pressure
pulse.
The continuous wave system utilises a spinning, slotted rotor and slotted stator
that repeatedly obstructs mud flow. This operation generates a continuous low
frequency fluctuation in standpipe pressure of approximately 50psi.
One of the most common applications for a directional MWD system is to orient downhole
motor/bent sub assemblies when changing the course of the well path. Sensors located
immediately above the bent sub, taking measurements while the bit is drilling on bottom,
provide immediate data (inclination, azimuth and tool face) to the Directional Driller.
As already discussed in the description of steering tool systems, tool face may be referred to
magnetic North or high side of the hole, depending on hole inclination.
9.4.2.
Gyroscopic Surveys
Gyro instruments are used when the proximity of casings or other magnetic interference
precludes the use of magnetic tools.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
102 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Gyro Single Shot Surveys

Gyro single shot surveys are carried out on wireline. Since gyroscopes are delicate
instruments, running speeds should be within that recommended and the tool stopped and
started off gently.
The gyro instrument has the same mule shoe feature as the magnetic single shot used for
orientation and, although it uses a different system, the data obtained is the same, (i.e. hole
direction, inclination and tool face).
The maximum depth to which they can be effectively run is approx. 1,300ft about 400m. This
is a limitation imposed by the time taken between orienting the gyro on surface, running into
hole, taking the survey, pulling out of hole and checking the orientation.
The difference in azimuth between the initial orientation and final check on return to surface
is the amount the gyro has drifted or wandered off its true north orientation. The drift is
assumed to be constant for the time interval between initial and final orientation. The
correction is calculated by simply determining the proportion of drift occurring in the time
o
from the initial orientation to the survey picture being taken. Gyro drift is approx. 4 per hour
o
in static conditions and 8 per hour in dynamic conditions.
Gyro Multishot Surveys
The gyroscopic multishot is the survey tool for surveying extended intervals inside casing or
drill pipe without a non-magnetic drill collar. The tool comes in two sizes. The smaller one
can be run in completed wells or through drill pipe. The larger one is a more rugged tool and
is used to run surveys inside casing. Depending on the length of survey run, it will be a
number of hours before the calculated survey data are available.
Gyro multishot drifts are the same as that of the single shot gyro.
Surface Read-out Gyroscopes
Surface read-out gyroscopes are used for the same purposes in single shot and multishot
data collection. The instrumentation is more sophisticated and requires a conducting wireline
to power the tool and transmit the information back to the surface for decoding by computer.
With a surface read-out multishot gyro, the drift can be constantly monitored to ensure the
tool is performing well and the calculated survey is produced shortly after completing the log
run.
Gyrocompass (North Seeking Gyroscope)
These instruments use the principle of earth rate gyro compassing to define true azimuth
and inclination in near vertical parts of the borehole. Then, as the hole builds angle to above
o
15 , it switches to a continuous integrating mode. This dual mode makes the tool accurate in
either vertical and deviated borehole where it eliminates the inaccuracies that gyrocompass
based instruments have at high latitude, high inclination or in the East/West axis. The
rugged construction makes these tools capable of steering and surveying while drilling (Gyro
While Drilling).
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
103 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
9.4.3.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Survey Calculation Methods

When drilling on a cluster, the co-ordinates of the centre of the 30" conductor shall be used
on the rig for computations of each individual well.
The centre of the cluster may be used by the Company Drilling Office for mapping, planning
and reporting.
There are a number of methods of calculating the wellbore trajectory from the survey data.
The most common are:
Average angle method: It assumes the borehole is parallel to the simple

average of both the drift and bearing angles between two survey stations. It is
fairly accurate and calculation is simple enough for field use with a non
programmable scientific calculator. (Refer to figure 9.h).
Radius of curvature: Using sets of angles measured at the upper and lower
ends of sections along the surveyed course length, it generates a space curve
representing the wellbore path. For each survey interval, it assumes that the
vertical and horizontal projections of the curve have constant curvature.
Minimum curvature method: Shall be used on the rig, in Company Drilling
office and Directional Drilling Contractor office for survey computations. It
assumes the borehole is a spherical arc with minimum curvature (maximum
radius of curvature) between survey stations. It is the most accurate for most
boreholes, however it requires very complex calculations using a programmable
calculator or computer.
ARPO
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
104 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Average Angle Method
North = MD x sin(l1 + L2 ) / 2 x cos A1 + A 2 / 2
East = MD x sin(l1 + l 2 )2 x sin(A 1 + A 2 ) / 2
Vertical = MD x cos(l1 + l 2 ) / 2
A1
A2
I1
N
W
I2
E
Radius Of Curvature Method
North =
East =
MD x (cos l1 cos l2 ) x (sin A 2 sin A1)

(l2 l1) x (A 2 A1)
A1
MD x (cos l1 cos l1) x (cos A1 cos A 2 )

(l2 l1) x (A 2 A 2 )
I1
A2
I2
N
E
W
S
Minimum Curvature Method
North = (MD)/ 2 x sin l1 x cos A1 + sin l2 x cos A 2 x RF
DL
2
East = (MD ) / 2 x (sin l1 x sin A 1 + sin l2 x sin A 2 ) x RF
DL
2
A1
Vertical = (MD ) / 2 x (cos l1 + cos l 2 ) x RF
RF = 2 / DL x tan (DL / 2 )
I1
DL
cos(DL ) = cos(l l) sin l x sin x [1 cos (A a )]
A2
I2
W
S
Figure 9.H - Survey Calculation Methods
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
105 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
9.4.4.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Drilling Directional Wells

Kicking Off The Well
Jetting is the term used to describe the deviation of a well using bit hydraulics to erode the
formation in a particular direction. A special jetting bit may be used or a conventional tricone
bit run with two undersized and one oversized (or blanked) jet nozzles. Usually the bit is run
on a typical build up assembly (bit, full gauge near bit stabiliser, orienting sub, non-magnetic
and steel-drill collars as required) and once on bottom the blind nozzle, representing the tool
face, is oriented in the desired direction. Maximum circulation is then established and the
washing action begun. Some of string weight is slackened on the bit and the weight indicator
will give an indication of drilling off if the formation is soft enough to be washed out.
In formations where the degree of compactation makes jetting ineffective, deviation is
started with a downhole motor. This has become the most commonly adopted method of
kick off.
With downhole motors, bent and orienting subs (or combined bent/orienting sub) are
required. With the deflection assembly in the hole, there is a correction to apply to the
desired tool face setting or proposal direction. This correction is due to the reactive torque
developed by downhole motors. Reactive torque is dependent on motor power, weight on bit,
formation, hole inclination and drilling assembly design and length. The actual value of
reactive torque must be assessed as drilling proceeds as it is unique to the conditions
prevailing.
During the kick off, the advantages and/or disadvantages of the different methods of
orientation are highlighted. With single shot orientation, reactive torque can only be
estimated based on the experience of the Directional Driller in the area of operation. Since
the survey tool is at least one joint above the bit, the first assessment of actual reactive
torque can be made only after the second joint has been drilled.
Steering tools provide the most accurate measurement of tool face position. A continuous
read-out on surface enables adjustment of the weight on bit/rate of penetration in order to
maintain a constant tool face. MWD tools provide the same information with the advantage
of not requiring wireline and the consequent rigging up and trip time. On the other hand,
steering tools provide extremely high data rates that may be of critical importance when
drilling with very high rates of penetration.
Build Up Section
After the desired direction has been reached, the kick off assembly may be replaced with a
rotary build up assembly. However, if jetting has been the method of initial control, drilling
can continue with the same BHA in the rotary mode without requiring a trip. Selection of the
appropriate build up assembly is dependent upon the angle achieved during initial kick off
and maximum angle required.
figure 9.i illustrates the response of some bottom hole assemblies.
The decision of when and if to replace the kick off assembly depends on several factors
such as hole size, weight on bit and rate of penetration, response of the kick off assembly,
residual bit life and final planned inclination. Controlling the BUR is imperative if fatigue to
drill pipe and drill collars is to be avoided.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
106 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
This can be accomplished by varying the drilling parameters (weight on bit, rotary speed and
pump pressure) or changing the BHA. In this case careful assessment must be made to
consider whether the amount of time lost in tripping out of hole to change the assembly,
would be gained later with a better rate of penetration or by preventing difficulties.
The alternative is to accept the current performance and make adjustments at the next bit
trip.
Tangent Section (Hold On Section)
When the desired inclination has been reached, the kick off or build up assembly is replaced
with a stiff bottom hole assembly that will maintain the inclination and direction. Small
variation in behaviour of a BHA can be obtained by adjusting the weight on bit and rotary
speed.
figure 9.k, illustrates some common holding assemblies.
Providing it is necessary, the earlier a correction to inclination or direction can be made the
better it is. As the bit get closer to the target, longer corrections are required to get the well
back on the target. Advanced planning should be continuously done during operations to
ensure that, should a trip become necessary at short notice, any change to the BHA may be
made at the same time.
Drop Off Section
Drilling a directional well it may be necessary to allow the drift angle to straighten back to
vertical or near vertical. figure 9.l shows some common drop off assemblies.
Drop off assemblies should be used starting with the least successful. The reason being that
the higher the inclination, the greater the pendulum effect and the same rate of drop might
o
be achieved with the least successful assembly at 50 and the most successful assembly at
o
30 . Therefore, as the inclination is reduced, stronger dropping tendency assemblies may be
run to maintain the rate of drop required.
Only where the maximum negative side force is required, at low inclinations and in hard
formations, should pendulum assemblies be run (i.e. assemblies without a near bit).
Care Of Stabilisers
The bottom 120ft (40m) of a drilling assembly is the critical portion for controlling a
1
directional well. The stabilisers used in this area should be full gauge to /16" under unless
under-gauge stabilisers are required to hold or drop angle.
Stabilisers shall be gauged each trip: undersized tools should be moved up higher in drill
collar assembly or replaced with full gauge tools (Refer to Section 8.10).
All stabilisers shall be magnafluxed at the end of each well phase.
As a general rule, do not drill out the casing shoe with a packed hole assembly. However,
the decision whether or not to use stabilisers to drill casing shoe shall be evaluated case by
case.
ARPO
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
107 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Drill Collars
String Stabiliser
60' Drill Collars
Maximum
Angle Building
Assemblies
30' Drill Collars
Near Bit Stabiliser
Near Bit Stabiliser
Bit
Bit
String Stabiliser
String Stabiliser
30' Drill Collar

30' Non Mag.
Drill Collar
30' Non Mag.
Drill Collar
Near Bit Stabiliser
Near Bit Stabiliser
Bit
Bit
Maximum
Angle Building
Assemblies
String Stabilisers
String Stabiliser
String Stabilizer
30' Non Mag.

Drill Collar
30' Non Mag.

Drill Collar
30' Non Mag.

Drill Collar
String Stabilisers
String Stabilisers
10' Drill Collar
10' Drill Collar
Near Bit Stabilisers
Near Bit Stabilisers
Bit
Bit
String Stabiliser
10' Drill Collar
Near Bit Stabilier
Bit
Figure 9.I - Build up Assembles
Packed
Hole
Assemblies
ARPO
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Bottom Hole Assembly Response

Assembly
Response
No.
Relative *
response
stenght
Near bit stabiliser (Approx.

3-5' from bit face to leading
edge of stabiliser)
Bit
90'
Build
10
Build
Build
Build
7-3
Build
7-5
Build
5-3
Build
4-2
60'
30'
60'
30'
30'
45'
15'
Build (drops under

certain circumstances)
30'
30'
30'
15'
30'
30'
15'
30'
30'
15'
30'
5-10'
30'
45'
3-2
30'
Hold
10
Hold
10
11
Hold
12
Hold
13
Hold
5-8
14
Hold
1-3
15a
Drop
10
15b
Drop
10
16
Drop
5 - 10 **
17
Drop & Build
30'
30'
30'
30'
60 - 70'
60 - 70'
30'
45'
18
19
108 OF 234
Drop (at highter incl.) and/or

Build (at lower incl.)
Drop or Build (highly
dependent on collar OD)
* 10 is the highest and 1 is the lowest
30'
30'
= Undergauge
** (smaller holes con be better than 15)
Figure 9.J - Bottom Hole Assembly Response
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
109 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
NEAR BIT STABILISER

3' - 6'
ASSEMBLY A
30'
15' 20'
30' - 60' or
90'
MOST SUCCESFUL
3' - 6'
ASSEMBLY B
5' 15'
30'
30' - 60' or
90'
30'
MODERATELY SUCCESFUL
3' - 6'
30' - 34'
30' or 60'
30' or 60'
ASSEMBLY C
30' - 60' or
90'
LEAST SUCCESFUL
Figure 9.K - Common Holding Assembly
ASSEMBLY A
3' - 6'
15' 20'
30'
30' - 60' or
90'
MODERATELY SUCCESFUL
ASSEMBLY B
3' - 6'
5' 15'
30'
30' - 60' or
90'
30'
LEAST SUCCESFUL
3' - 6'
30' - 34'
30' or 60'
ASSEMBLY C
MOST SUCCESFUL
Figure 9.L - Drop Off Assembly
30' or 60'
30' - 60' or
90'
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
110 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
9.4.5.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Dog Leg Severity

Changes in hole curvature are often referred to as dog-legs
The severity of a dog-leg is determined by the average changes in angle and/or direction
calculated on the distance over which this change occurs. For example, if there is a 3
change in angle (no direction change) over 100ft of hole, the dog-leg severity is 3 per 100ft.
Until a dog-leg reaches some threshold value, no drill stem fatigue damage occurs. This
threshold value is called the Critical Dog-leg. The critical dog-leg is dependent upon the
dimension (size) and metallurgy of the drill pipe and drill pipe tension (pull) in the dog-leg.
The planning of directional wells should include a Dog-leg control programme. Critical dog
leg limits should also be considered for drill collars.
Dog-leg limits are established to prevent drill pipe fatigue, but when those limits are
maintained, there is also a reduction in associated hole problems. Excessive dog-legs cause
key seats, casing wear, rotating torque, trip drag, etc. Overall drilling rate can be greatly
improved by a carefully planned and executed dog-leg control programme (Refer to Section
8.1).
1)
If extreme torque is encountered during drilling deviated holes, consider the following
(in order of priority):
Improve hole cleaning verifying the flow velocity in the drill pipe/open hole
annulus and adjusting mud properties (high instantaneous gels, low viscosity
and, conditions permitting, high mud weight).
Add a non-polluting torque reducer additive or, if possible, diesel oil (to a
maximum of 10% diesel) to the mud.
On the subsequent trip leave out some drill collars and stabilisers. Replace with
HWDP. Replace the near bit stabiliser with a near bit roller reamer (if available).
2)
Set casing through the build up section to 200-300ft (60-90m) in the tangent section, if
possible.
The use of hard-banded drill pipe is not allowed inside casing.
Check the DP tool joints every trip with a fixed caliper.
It is recommended to have a magnet placed in the flow line to collect metal cuttings
coming out of the hole. Excessive metal cuttings may indicate casing wear or collision
with another well (on a cluster). In case of indications that the drill pipe and casing are
eroding , the following actions are suggested:
Check alignment of derrick over the centre of the well.
Check the wear bushing on the first trip.
Use lowest practical rpm and consider the use of downhole motor.
Use the minimum practical weight of bottom hole assembly.
Do not rotate with the bit off bottom.
Install protectors at less than 3ft (1m) above worn tool joints and, if so required,
also 3ft (1m) below tool joints in any section of the top hole where the hole
curvature makes it necessary. Minimum OD of the protectors is 7.
3)
4)
5)
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
2)
3)
4)
5)
111 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
1)
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Inspect the DP after a certain amount of thousand feet is drilled, or rotating hours,
specified by the Company Drilling Office. This operation shall be carried out by a
recognised inspection company. Drill collars, stabilisers, subs, etc. shall be checked at
the end of each well.
Read the single shot survey film discs or MWD data to ensure the correct path is being
followed.
Check survey calculations for correctness.
Keep well plot updated every time a new survey is taken.
The baffle plate for the survey instrument should be located at the bottom of the
bottom non-magnetic drill collar.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
IDENTIFICATION CODE
PAGE
112 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
10.
CORING
10.1.
CORE BARREL TYPES AND USES

To achieve the optimum core recovery with regard to quantity and quality under widely
varying conditions, a variety of coring equipment has been designed to meet this as follows:
10.1.1. Wireline
The Wireline, or Drill Core system, can be used for continuous drilling and/or coring
operations. The inner barrel or the drill plug centre of the core bit can be installed by
dropping it from the surface and retrieving it by wireline thus avoiding pulling of the drill
string.
10.1.2. Marine Core Barrels
The Marine Core Barrel was developed for offshore coring, where a stronger core barrel is
required. The marine core barrel is very similar to the conventional core barrel except that
the outer tube has heavier wall thickness.
10.1.3. Rubber Sleeve
The Rubber Sleeve Core Barrel is a tool designed for a special application to recover
undisturbed cores in soft, unconsolidated formations. As the core is cut, it is encased in the
rubber sleeve, which contains and supports it. Using face discharge ports in the bit, the
contamination of the core by circulating fluid is reduced. The rubber sleeve core barrel has
proven to be a very effective tool, even although it has limitations; i.e.:
Only one size of barrel is available which is limited to cutting a 20ft core.
The rubber sleeve becomes weak with a tendency to split if the temperature
increases to above 80 C.
10.1.4. Conventional Core Barrel

Because of the Conventional Core Barrel's reliability, ease of operation and simplicity of
maintenance, it is unsurpassed for trouble free operation.
Listed in table 10.a are the various sizes of core barrels for conventional and special coring
systems. In table 10.b, are listed the core system applications and in table 10.c are the
comparison of coring operations.
The reason for the wide range of core barrel sizes is the variance in hole sizes drilled
throughout the world, and the availability of fishing tools.
Generally in most instances, it is better to cut and recover the largest diameter of core
possible, while still having the ability to wash over and fish for the core barrel. The larger the
core, the less the formation that has to be cut by the core bit, and the faster will be the
penetration rate. When coring broken or fractured type formations, the larger core tends to
hold the natural position and cause less jamming problems.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
113 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Core Barrel Type
Outer Tube OD
Core Size
(ins)
(ins)
CONVENTIONAL CORING SYSTEMS
1
1
2 /8
4 /8
Series 250P
3
5
4 /4
2 /8
3
1
5 /4
3 /2
1
6 /4
4
3
6 /4
4
1
8
5 /4
3
5
2 /8
4 /4
Aluminium Inner Tube
3
1
5 /4
3 /2
3
6 /4
4
1
8
5 /2
1
1
2 /8
4 /2
Marine Series
1
6 /4
3
1
3
1 /4
3 /2
Slim Hole
SPECIAL CORING SYSTEMS
3
5
2 /8
4 /4
Fibreglass Inner Tube
3
6 /4
4
1
8
5 /4
3
1
2 /4
4 /4
PVC Inner Tube
3
5 /4
3
1
1
6 /4
3 /2
3
1
6 /4
3 /2
3
8
4 /4
3
6 /4
4
Full Closure System
3
1
6 /4
3 /2
3
6 /8
3
Rubber Sleeve
1
6
2 /2
Pressure Core Barrel
1
6 /4
2
Wireline Drill-Core
1
6 /4
3
Marine Soil Sampler
3
6 /4
4
HD45 Long Distance Barrel
Table 10.A - Various Core Barrel Sizes
Inner Tube Length

(ft)
30 - 120
30 - 120
30 - 120
30 - 120
30 - 120
30 - 120
30 - 90
30 - 90
30 - 90
30 - 90
30 - 120
30 - 120
30
30 - 90
30 - 90
30 - 90
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
20
10 - 20
13 - 26
15 - 30
45
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
114 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
10.1.5. Inner Tubes

A variety of inner tubes are available to match the formation and application:
Standard steel inner tube

Fibreglass inner tube
Aluminium inner tube.
Fibreglass and aluminium tube are designed to recover undisturbed cores to the surface and
to allow them to be transported from the field to the laboratory without damage or
contamination. The fibreglass inner tube bears temperatures up to 150C. Aluminium tubes
are used to recover cores from extreme temperature wells or other environments where
fibreglass tubes are not suitable.
Fibreglass and aluminium inner tubes are machined in the same manner as the standard
steel tubes and can be interchanged without modification. Therefore coring is performed in
exactly the same manner as coring with conventional steel inner tubes.
10.1.6. Modified Barrels
Liners
In the past few years the conventional and marine core barrels have been modified by
adding inner barrel liners.
Plastic liners (PVC or ABS) provide an economical protection for cores of soft, friable,
broken or otherwise unconsolidated formations and help to protect and preserve the core
during removal and transportation.
Plastic liners are run inside conventional steel inner barrels and, hence, recover a smaller
OD core. They must be used with a special adapter and core heads.
Oriented Coring
Oriented coring provides important geological information such as the direction of faults and
fractures, the amount and direction of dip, etc.
Most of the conventional barrel types can also be adapted for oriented coring. A special shoe
assembly with knives is installed for lightly scribing grooves in the core as it enters the inner
barrel and an electronic multishot, set in a non magnetic collar above the barrel, is aligned
with one of the knives.
The pressure relief plug is replaced by a rod extending up into the non-magnetic collar,
providing support for the survey instrument.
The directional survey instrument has a reference mark on the shoe, by a connecting rod
through the inner barrel. Once the position of the directional survey instrument and the mark
on the shoe is locked, the core can always be orientated towards north.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
115 OF 234
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Recoverable Formation
Properties
Consolidated Formations
Standard Full Closure

System
z
z
Rubber
Sleeve
z
ContainPressure
erised Core
Core
z
Soft, Unconsolidated Formations
Formations Prone to Jamming
z
z
Formations Prone to Washing
In-situ Formation Properties, i.e.

oil water saturation, mobile oil, gas
content, etc.
Table 10.B - Core System Applications
Type
Relative
Cost
High
Low
Ease of
Operation
Quality of
Samples
High
High
Low
Conventional
x
x
PVC
x
x
Ployglass
x
x
Rubber-Sleeve
x
x
Wireline
x
x
Pressure Barrel
x
x
x
Sponge Barrel
x
x
x
Sidewall
x
x
(1) = In oil base mud.
(2) = CO2 only.
Perm
Por
Low
x
x
x
x
x
Oil
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Table 10.C - Comparison of Coring Operations
x
x
Saturation
H2O
Gas
x
x(1)
x
x(2)
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
116 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
10.2.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
GENERAL GUIDELINES
1)
Coring in 8 /2" holes shall be carried out by using a conventional core barrel (6 /4 x 4)
1
1
1
or Marine Core Barrel (6 /4" x 3" or 7 /4" x 4") with a 8 /2" diamond or PDC core head.
1
3
Coring in 12 /4" holes can be carried out by using a standard core barrel (6 /4 x 4,
1
1
1
1
6 /4 x 3, 7 /4 x 4), Marine Core Barrel (6 /4" x 3" or 7 /4" x 4") or a full size core barrel
1
1
(8" x 5 /4 ") with a 12 /4 " core head. The full size core barrel is preferable when long
section of hole must be cored
3
Coring in a 6 hole can be carried out using the conventional core barrel (4 /4 x 2 /8)
2)
Core barrels can be run in multiples of 30ft sections to a maximum of 180ft.

Continuous coring can be carried out using a tool length according to the field practice
and the type of core barrel in use.
3)
The inner tube material(steel, aluminium, fibreglass, etc.) or liner (PVC, ABS, etc.)
shall be chosen according to the formation characteristics and bottom hole
temperature.
Ensure that the necessary fishing equipment is available before running the core
barrel.
Check the inner tube's integrity and space-out prior to running in the hole.
The core barrel shall be stabilised on bottom and top with special stabilisers in order to
reduce the wear on the gauge of the bit with, consequently, crooked and under gauged
holes.
1
15
15
If a 8 /2" core bit is used, the stabiliser will have a 8 /32" OD. If a 8 /32" core bit is used,
7
the stabiliser should have a 8 /16" OD.
4)
5)
6)
7)
The core barrel shall be run on a stabilised BHA. The stabilisation of the BHA shall be,
when possible, the same as used for drilling.
Coring, especially in hard formations, requires full stabilisation to allow higher weight to
be applied to the bit.
Higher weight on an unstabilised core barrel can cause jamming, spiralling and
flattening of cores.
Note:
8)
9)
10)
11)
Different configurations can be chosen by the Directional Drilling

Engineer and/or Coring Engineer.
If required, it is possible to use MWD and the core barrel in tandem, placing the steel
ball on the pressure relief plug before running in hole. In this case circulation through
the core shoe is impossible.
Do not install a MWD tool on a core barrel in a deviated well with a fractured formation.
If a drilling jar is run in the string, the inside diameter of this tool must be compatible
with the ball diameter of the core barrel.
If the Company Drilling and Completion Supervisor deems it necessary (e.g. presence
of iron in the well), a trip with a junk basket shall be made.
If the coring point is known, a junk basket can be run in the drilling assembly used to
reach the coring point depth.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
117 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
10.3.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
0
15
12)
If continuous coring, ream with a drill bit at least every 100ft (27m) if a 8 /32" core bit is
used.
1
With the use of 8 /2" core bit this operation is unnecessary.
13)
Take and record the Reduced Pump Stroke Pressure (RPSP) with the core barrel in
the hole, after dropping the ball and with it in place.
CORING PROCEDURES
10.3.1. Operating Instructions

The following instructions apply to all sizes of core barrels.
Junk
On the last rock bit run prior to coring, ensure that the hole is free from junk, by running a
junk sub in the assembly. If any doubt exists as to cleanliness of the hole, it may be
advisable to run a reverse circulation basket or magnet, thus ensuring the complete removal
of junk off bottom.
Tight hole
If it is known that hole problems (i.e. dog legs, tight spots, etc.) exist in the open hole, it is
advised that the hole be well circulated and a wiper trip be carried out before coring. Care
must be taken to avoid sticking of the core barrel in these problematic areas.
Core head selection
Make the core head selection based on previous experience, bit records and formation to be
drilled.
Drill collars
Firstly, check the core barrel connections are compatible with the drill collars. If not, ensure a
cross over is available.
Drilling practices dictate that sufficient collars are run to keep the drill pipe in tension and
have sufficient weight to place on the bit. Similarly this practice is desirable whilst coring.
Stabilisation
As with diamond drilling, it is important that adequate stabilisation be run, keeping the core
head steady on bottom, ultimately assisting bit life and core recovery.
The recommended assembly is, two drill collars, stabilisers etc. This should be strictly
adhered to, as the core barrel will be the weakest point of the bottom hole assembly. If drill
collar stabilisers are not run, premature failure of core barrel thread connections may occur.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
118 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Circulation
All core barrels are designed to run using various circulation mediums, i.e. air, water, drilling
mud, with the variations that these materials may have.
The volume to be circulated will be determined by mud the type, diameter and depth of hole,
pumps and formation. Once an average circulation rate has been established, variations of
weight and rotary can be carried out. The flow can also be varied to achieve maximum
cleaning and cooling of the core head.
Too low a flow rate can be detrimental as the cuttings will not be removed sufficiently quickly
from the bit face, resulting in regrinding of the cuttings, slowed penetration rate and possible
burning of core head. Too high a circulation rate will lift the bit off bottom resulting in
diamond damage. There is also a possibility that loss of core can occur due to washing the
core as it the enters bit throat. If this problem is suspected to be occurring when coring
loosely consolidated formations, a face discharge bit run with a pilot type lower shoe should
be applied. In these situations an emphasis should be made on cutting short cores, as the
weight of the core in the inner tube should not exceed the formation strength of the material
being cored, reducing again the possibility of breaking down of core and subsequent
removal by washing.
Loss circulation material
Most core barrels can operate efficiently with LCM. However, care must be taken in the
mixing of the material, to avoid large masses of material which could possibly block the core
barrel or core head fluid water exhaust.
Rotary speed
When starting to core, a slow rotary speed of 40-50rpm should be applied. As the core
enters the inner barrel and weight is added, the rotary can be increased. When carrying out
a drill off test, the optimum rotary speed can be determined. Check critical drill pipe rotary
speeds and avoid rotating in these areas. Through experience it has been found that a safe
maximum rotary speed of 150rpm can be applied on core barrels, although in general a
rotary speed between 70-120rpm is sufficient to core most formations.
Weight on core head
The weight run on the core head will be determined by the size of core head , size of core
barrel and the nature of formation to be cored. When coring has commenced the minimum
starting weight should be applied. Once core head has drilled a pattern and first stabiliser
has entered the new hole, the weight can be increased in small increments (i.e. 2,000lbs)
until optimum performance is achieved. Avoid exceeding the recommended maximum
weight. Once a satisfactory weight has been reached, it should be maintained and not
allowed to drill off.
Torque
Excessive or fluctuating torque should be avoided. Torque readings will change with varying
formations or excessive weight and rotary speed. If high or fluctuating torque exists, find the
correct combination of weight and rotary to achieve as smooth and as steady a torque
reading as possible.
10.3.2. Preparing for Coring
1)
Prior to pulling out of the hole for coring, make a short trip to the last casing shoe.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
3)
119 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
2)
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Return to bottom, circulate bottoms up and then pull out of the hole.
Ensure that there are no restrictions in the string to stop the passage of the pressure
relief plug ball. If any doubt exists, a drift of the drill string shall be carried out to ensure
the correct passage of the ball.
In full hole coring, tripping into the hole shall be methodical. Caution should be
exercised at all tight places to prevent the core head from sticking. Tight places must
be reamed out by rotating at maximum of 30rpm and using the maximum circulating
rate and minimum weight.
Reaming of long intervals should be avoided with core heads, as their life can be
adversely affected.
4)
When the bottom is reached, make up the kelly and wash down to bottom taking a
note of the pressure.
When a large amount of fill is encountered, it is advisable to clean to the bottom by
circulating out the fill rather than coring it out. Use as little rotation as possible. Wash
out slowly picking up periodically and checking kelly measurements with the pipe tally.
When the true bottom is reached a weight on bit gain accompanied by a pressure
increase should be noted.
5)
Once it is fully established that the bottom has been successfully reached, circulate for
a further 10 to 15mins to clean out the inner barrel.
Pick up, break off the kelly and drop the steel ball. If necessary space out with pup
joints in order to avoid (or minimise) pipe connection while coring.
Make up the kelly and pump the ball down at a good circulation rate (allow one minute
per 1,000ft). When the ball reaches the pressure relief plug a slight pressure increase
should be observed.
With the ball in place record the off bottom pressure at the same circulating rate that
will be used during coring.
6)
7)
8)
10.3.3. Starting of the Coring Operation

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Check the pump strokes ensuring that the correct circulation rate is being delivered to
the core head.
Lower the core barrel on to bottom and apply a weight of 5,000 to 7,000lbs (2 to 3t).
Start rotating, bringing the speed up slowly to 40-50 rpm.
When sure that core head has seated, (this should be apparent through pressure
increase) maintain the starting weight until approximately one foot has been cored.
After cutting the 1ft (30cm) of core, the weight should then be increased in 2,000lbs
increments. Increase the rotary speed to approximately 60 rpm. Once 2 or 3ft (0.5-1m)
has been cored, the weight and rotary speed can be varied to achieve the maximum
performance.
In general a rotary speed between 70 and 120 rpm is used to core most formations.
Slow rotary speeds are beneficial when coring fractured formations. Using speeds of
30 to 40 rpm produces less disturbance of the core.
The pump pressure should now have increased and levelled out. Therefore the pump
strokes should be checked ensuring original flow rate is maintained. Take note of
pressure and watch it constantly throughout the coring. Pump pressure increases or
decreases are an indication that something abnormal is occurring and the cause
should be determined and remedied. Make sure the flow rate has not changed due to
a variation in SPM, pump malfunction or wash out in the string.
ARPO
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
8)
9)
120 OF 234
If the pump pressure increase and the torque decreases, this generally indicates
a formation change.
If the pump pressure, penetration rate and torque decreases simultaneously, this
indicates the barrel has jammed.
If the pump pressure and torque increases simultaneously, the core head has
probably ringed
The table 10.d shows flow rates given as a general guide only.
If situation is not corrected after a short time, the barrel should be pulled immediately
to avoid excessive damage to core head, core barrel or loss of the core.
Hole Size (ins)

1
12 /4
1
8 /2
Barrel Size
(ins)
8
3
6 /4
Soft Formation
300/400
160/250
Flow Rate
GPM
Hard Formation
570/650
280/300
Table 10.D - Coring Flow Rate

10.3.4. Possible Cause Of Pump Pressure Changes
a)
Pressure changes could possibly be due to changes in flow rate, debris in pump valve
seats or washed liner. Check the pump strokes and condition of the pump first.
b)
Pressure decreases could be attributed to the core jamming or filling of the barrel. This
can occur in fractured or laminated formations, the core being jammed in the inner
barrel or core catcher holding the bit off bottom, thus increasing flow area and causing
a decrease in pump pressure.
However, in soft unconsolidated formations, it has been known for the pressure to
increase, indicating that the formation being cored has jammed and is being drilled
rather than cored and excess material is plugging the waterways of the core head.
Again in soft material the core may jam and no pressure charge be noted. However,
the first instance is more likely.
Another possible cause could be a wash out in the drill string. In any of these cases it
would be advisable to pull out of the hole.
c)
Pressure increase, if the mud volume is constant, it is possible that the core head has
O ringed, i.e. the diamonds have been damaged letting the formation abrade the
matrix, blocking off the fluid course and restricting fluid flow, therefore creating a
pressure increase. An O ring occurrence can be determined by picking up of the
bottom, the pressure should then fall to normal off bottom pressure.
d)
When re-tagging bottom, if the pressure increase is immediate, this confirms that core
head damage has occurred.
e)
Another possible cause for pressure increase could be the inner barrel or swivel
assembly backing out and sitting on the core head. This can be determined by picking
up off bottom, it is most likely in this case that the pressure will remain high. In either
case the barrel should be pulled immediately.
f)
Minor fluctuations in pressure could possibly be due to changes in formation, while

mud is being mixed or unbalanced mud in the hole after a trip.
10.3.5. Breaking Core (Making A Connection Or Pulling Barrel)
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
121 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
When it becomes necessary to make a connection, or to pull a full core barrel, the following
procedure should be followed:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Stop the rotary table and shut off the pump. Mark the kelly.
Pick up the drill string until the weight indicator shows the core spring has gripped the
core. Continue picking up until core breaks or the recommended pull is reached. If the
core does not break with the maximum strain, then start the pump at normal coring
flow rate and hold the pull on the core until it breaks.
After the core has broken, raise the core head 10ft (3m) and then lower slowly back to
within one foot of the bottom checking the weight indicator to see if there is any
obstruction caused by core left in the hole.
If the core appears to be properly caught in the barrel, pick up and pull out of hole if
coring is completed or make a connection if coring should be continued.
When coring is resumed after a connection, run to bottom without rotary or circulation
and add weight approximately 50% higher than normal coring weight. This additional
weight should release the core from the core spring, permitting the passage of new
core into the inner barrel.
Pick up the drill string until the normal coring weight is reached. Start the pump at the
normal rate. Bring the rotary speed up slowly to normal rotation and continue to core.
Make sure the pump pressures are normal when coring is recommenced.
10.3.6. Recovery of the Core

The following procedures cover the conventional inner tube. If other inner tube or rubber
sleeve is used, the core recovery will be executed by a Coring Engineer.
When the core barrel is full or it becomes necessary to pull out of the hole, the following
procedure should be followed:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Break the core and pull out of hole. When tripping, care should be taken when setting
slips to avoid jarring the barrel as core loss may occur. It may also be advantageous to
chain out the pipe whilst in open hole.
Special attention has to be paid during tripping in order to avoid pipe sticking.
If any drag occurs, rotate the pipe slowly with the slips in. Do not exceed 30,000lbs
(15t) overpull.
The core shall be recovered under the Company Well Site Subsurface Geologist's
supervision.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
2)
3)
4)
122 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
1)
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
When the core barrel reaches surface place a collar clamp above the slips. Break off
the last stand of collars and stand back in the derrick. Remove steel ball from the core
barrel using the pick up tool. Make up an elevator sub, and torque up the sub using the
tongs.
Pull the core barrel out of the rotary table. Break off the bit. Make up a core barrel
protector making sure it is tight.
Run the core barrel back into the rotary table, a visual inspection of the core barrel and
stabilisers can be carried out whilst the barrel is being lowered. Set the slips below the
top stabilisers, replace the collar clamp.
Break out the safety joint, rotate out using chain tongs, and pull out the inner barrel.
Check the inner barrel connection has been pulled. Break off inner tube shoe lower
half (catcher) using chain tongs or a pipe wrench. Place the core tong shoe on the
inner barrel. The shoe should be backed out on the rig floor preventing core from
falling out of the inner tube. Put the core tong handle on the core tong shoe. Exert
pressure on the core tong handle and pick up the inner barrel slowly. Remove the inner
tube shoe.
The core can now be removed from the inner barrel, as the inner tube is picked up.
When desired boxing length is reached, exert pressure on the core tong handle. The
exposed core can then be removed and boxed. Lower the barrel, keeping pressure on
the core tong handle until the core in the core tong is resting on the floor. The pressure
on the core tong handle can now be released, pick up inner tube again exposing core.
This procedure should be continue until the core marker comes out of the inner tube. If
however the core marker or further core does not appear, lower the inner tube onto the
floor and knock the inner barrel with a sledge hammer until the core falls. Do not
repeat the sledge hammer blows to the same area on the inner barrel as this will
damage the tube.
If the core can not be removed in this manner it will be necessary to lay down the inner
tube and pump out the core. Using the pump out bean and plunger, the core can be
pumped out using water as a medium. Do not under any circumstances use
pressurised air.
9)
Once the removal of the core has been completed, clean off the catcher and lower
shoe, replace if necessary. Make up the lower shoe up onto the inner barrel, tighten
with chain tongs using cheater bars. Run the inner barrel back into the outer tube.
Check for bearing wear, if excessive change out. Check the O rings. If all are in good
condition, regrease the safety joint and make up to the recommended torque. Break
off the protector. Evaluate the core head wear and change out if necessary.
10)
Make up the core head. Pick up the barrel. Ensure the inner barrel is rotating freely, by
placing a hand inside the core catcher and rotating. The barrel is now ready to run into
the hole for further coring.
In case of continuous coring, ream with a drill bit at least every 100ft (27m) but only if a
15
1
8 /32" core head is used. With the use of a 8 /2" core bit this operation is not
necessary.
Reaming shall be avoided when using a core barrel. If this has to be done, use the
maximum circulating rate with minimum weight and rotate at a maximum of 30rpm.
11)
12)
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
10.4.
123 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
1)
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Refer to the Manufacturers field handbook for assembly of the core barrel and specific
coring parameters.
CORING IN DEVIATED HOLES

o
In deviated holes (certainly in angles over 20 ), coring is more difficult because of the
additional forces caused by the weight on bit, the weight of the core barrel and of the drill
collars at such angles.
These gravity forces will bend the drill collars and core barrel. As a result the inner barrel will
also rotate and the bit will start to wobble. This again will result in poor recovery and unequal
wear of the core head. Also the hole angle and direction could be affected. In order to
minimise the bending, additional stabilisation is required.
It is recommended to use only a 30ft (9m) core barrel, instead of the normal length of 60ft
(18m).
1
When an 8 /2" core is cut in a larger hole (e.g. 12 /4") and a second run with the core barrel
is required, it could be difficult to re-enter the rat hole. In this case it is suggested that the rat
hole is enlarged with a bit to the original size first and then run the core barrel again.
When long intervals have to be cored a full size core head and core barrel will be used.
10.4.1. Stabilisation of the Outer Barrel
All coring in deviated holes must be done with a core head equipped with a piggy-back
stabiliser, whenever possible. This will keep the core head stable resulting in a good core
recovery.
The 30ft (9m) barrel should preferably be stabilised at the top, centre an bottom. These
o
15
stabilisers should have wide blades, right-hand spiral 360 wrap with an 8 /32" OD. This
means that the two barrel sections cannot be of the standard length, but must be only 13ft
long (4m).
10.4.2. Stabilisation of the Inner Barrel
The inner barrel should also be stabilised preferably with a stabiliser in the centre.
10.4.3. Stabilisation of the Drill Collar Assembly
The first string stabiliser must be placed directly on top of the core barrel, followed by a
stabiliser at 30ft (9m) and one at 60ft (18m) above the barrel. The remaining available
stabilisers should be evenly spaced out over the rest of the assembly, as required.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
IDENTIFICATION CODE
PAGE
124 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
11.
LEAK OFF TEST PROCEDURE

A Leak-Off Test (LOT) will be performed On Wild-Cat wells at each casing shoe after setting
the surface casing. LOTs are also recommended to be carried out on both appraisal and
development wells.
Leak Off Test and Formation Integrity Test (FIT), also termed the Limit Test, are for
formation strength pressure tests made just below the casing seat prior to drilling ahead.
These tests are carried out to:
Investigate the cement seal around the casing shoe which should be at least as
high as the predicted fracture pressure for the area.
Investigate the wellbore capability to withstand pressures below the casing shoe
in order to allow proper well planning with regard to the setting depth of the next
casing, mud weights and alternatives during well control operations.
Collect regional information on formation strengths and stress magnitude for
different applications including optimisation of future well planning, hole stability
analysis and modelling, reservoir application.
Prior to a test, a decision should be made to either increase the pressure until leak off
occurs (as in the LOT) or to stop at a predetermined pressure for a (FIT). It should be noted
that:
FIT does not obtain information on stress magnitude.

A LOT is designed and should be performed to determine, in a better way, the
desired data without breaking down the formation.
When a Formation Integrity Test is required, the maximum pumping pressure is often
expressed in terms of Equivalent Mud Weight (EMW):
Im perial units EMW =
P
+ MW
0. 052 x TVD
where:
P
Pumping Pressure (psi)
TVD
True Vertical Depth (ft)
MW
Actual Mud Weight (PPG)
Metric units EMW =
P x 10
+ MW
TVD
where:
2
Pumping Pressure (kg/cm )
TVD
True Vertical Depth (m)
MW
Actual Mud Weight (kg/l)
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
125 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Lots or FITs can be carried out in any open hole section and at any time while drilling the
hole, even if it is customary to have it performed some metres (6-15 metres) below the
casing. For instance, the casing seat can be in a shale and the first sand formation may be
encountered several hundred feet deeper. This will certainly be more permeable than the
shale, and a test can be performed to ascertain the maximum pressure this sand can hold. If
it is lower than the shale just below the casing seat, this sand becomes the limiting factor.
11.1.
TEST PROCEDURE
Prior to performing a formation strength test, prepare a sheet of graph paper to record
pressure versus cumulative mud volume.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Drill out the float equipment, clean the rat hole and drill 5m of new hole.
Circulate a mud quantity equal to the internal string volume plus the new hole plus 50m
internal casing volumes. This mud shall be cleaned and conditioned to the density and
filtrate as indicated in the Mud Programme to be used for the next drilling phase.
Pull the bit back into the casing shoe.
Rig up the cementing unit to the drill pipe. The unit shall be equipped with high
precision, low pressure gauges.
The range of the pressure gauge shall be selected based on the actual mud weight
and the estimated (LOT) or predetermined (FIT) pressure.
A pressure recorder should be used during the test. The use of the rig pumps for
making these tests are unsuitable.
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
Fill and test the lines with mud.

Break circulation with the cementing unit to make sure that the bit nozzles are clear.
Stop pumping when circulation is established.
Close the top pipe rams or the annular.
Open the annulus of the previous casings.
Pump slowly until pressure builds up.
Once pressure is established, pump uniform volumes of mud and wait for the pressure
1
to stabilise; flow rates range from /8 bbl/min (20l/min) up to a maximum of 1bbl/min
1
1
(160 l/min), however values of 0.25bbl (12 /4 and smaller holes) or 0.50bbl (17 /2
hole) are commonly used, and wait for two minutes, or the time required for the
pressure to stabilise.
Note the cumulative mud volume pumped, the final pumping and final static pressure.
Repeat steps (9) and (10) above and plot pressure versus cumulative mud volume for
each increment of pumped volume.
Continue this procedure until:
Two or three points on the plot are reached where the pressure deviates and
falls below the approximate straight line (or if the pressure does not increase with
the injected volume). The point on the plot where the curve begins to bend away
from the straight line is called Leak Off Point (Refer to figure 11.a).
Or the predetermined test pressure is reached.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
15)
16)
17)
126 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
14)
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Stop pumping, shut in the well, record and plot pressure versus time until stabilisation
(usually it takes 15-20min). In the early stage (2-3min) one value every 15-30sec
should be collected while for the remaining a value of pressure every 30-60sec may be
sufficient. The use of PACR or an equivalent device, if available, is preferred.
Bleed off the pressure and record the quantity of fluid returned into the cementing unit.
Compare it to the volume used for the test to obtain the amount of fluid lost to the
formation.
Open the BOP and calculate the formation strength in terms of Equivalent Mud
Weight using the lowest between leak off point pressure and stabilised pressure.
Collect the data recorded during the test in a data sheet together with the following
information: borehole diameter, depth of test, depth and type of the last casing, mud
density, plastic viscosity, filtrate and gels (refer to the example on the next page).
Note:
The pumping rate should be kept within the limits described in step 9). If
the rate is too low, filtration losses will mask any leakage loss, or, if the
rate is too high the formation may suddenly break and the leak off
pressure will not be determined. Also, the longer the open hole section,
the higher should be the injection rate. If the initial pumping rate is not
sufficient, the well should be depressured and the test restarted with a
higher rate.
Note:
If a float valve is used in the drilling string, the test can not be carried out
by pumping down the drill pipe. In this case rig up the cementing unit to
the choke or kill line, fill and test the lines against the fail-safe and
establish circulation through the riser. Close the BOP and perform the
formation strength test pumping down the annulus.
ARPO
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
127 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
SPER
33
LEAK-OFF TEST REPORT
Report N
Date:
WELL CODE:
WELL NAME:
Open hole depth (m):
Hole Diameter (in):
Last Csg. Shoe (m):
Csg. diameter (in):
Grade:
Weight (lb/ft):
Max. Burst pres (psi):
Litology:
825
121/4
797
133/8
J-55
61
3103
Shale
CONTRACTOR:
Mud Type:
Weight (Kg/l):
Marsh Viscosity (sec/Qt):
P.V.(cps):
Y.P.(lb/100 ft2):
Gels(lb/100 ft2):
W.L (cc/30 min):
FWGELS
1.3
44
19
5
2/8
10.5
Expected EMW
Time
(min)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
8.5
Volume
(bbl)
0.25
0.50
0.75
1.00
1.25
1.50
1.75
2.00
2.00
2.00
RIG NAME:
Rig type:
R.K.B. elevation (m):
Water Depth (m):
Pumps:
Liners (in):
Flow Rate (bpl):
Time
(min)
9
9.5
10
10.5
11
11.5
12
13
14
15
Volume
(bbl)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
J.UPs
26
24
12-P-160
6.5
0.25
Kg/cm /10 m
1.68
Pressure
(Psi)
50
100
250
380
450
480
520
550
520
505
RIG CODE:
Pressure
(Psi)
490
480
470
463
455
450
445
440
437
435
Time
(min)
16
Volume
(bbl)
2
Pressure
(Psi)
435
Note:
Pumped with a costant flow rate of (bbl):
Volume pumped (bbl):
Volume returned (bbl):
(psi)
Time
0
1000 20
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
(min)
19
900
800
P
re
s
s
ur
e
stop pump
700
600
shut in curve
500
400
8 minutes
300
200
100
0
0
0,25
0,5
0,75
1,25
1,5
1,75
2,25
2,5
2,75
3,25
3,5
3,75
4,25
4,5
4,75
(bbl)
Flow Rate
RESULTS: (Press. mud + Press. L.O. )x10/Depth=[(1.3 x 797 / 10) + (430 x 0.07)] x 10 / 797 = 1.68 (Kg/cm /10 m)
2
Note:
Company Representative
Figure 11.A - Leak-Off Test Report
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
128 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
12.
CASING RUNNING AND CEMENTING
12.1.
RESPONSIBILITIES
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Grade
The Company Drilling and Completion Supervisor is the person in charge of all casing
running and cementing operations.
The Company Drilling Engineer should be present on the rig, whenever possible, for
the intermediate casing operations and to assist the Drilling And Completion
Supervisor during critical phases, providing technical assistance.
The Company Drilling and Completion Supervisor shall ensure that all pipe is correctly
measured, all equipment is of proper size and type specified in the Drilling Programme
and that the most appropriate casing, running and cementing procedures are followed.
A detailed programme to include the casing design, stress calculations, string
composition, floating equipment, centralisation, special running procedures, cementing
calculations and procedures, etc. shall be compiled and available at least three days
before operations commence.
On the rig only the Company Drilling and Completion Supervisor, assisted by the
Company Drilling Engineer, is authorised to change the programme. detailed above.
However, consultation with the Company Shore Based Drilling Manager/
Superintendent is advisable, time and work permitting.
The Toolpusher, Driller, Cementing Operator, Mud Engineer and Mud Logging
Operators shall be given detailed instructions on their duties and responsibilities.
The following table 12.a (see API Specification No 811-05CT5) shows the colours and
number of bands for each grade of casing.
Pipe/Pipe Joints
Couplings
6ft or Longer
J 55
One bright green band
Entire coupling bright green and one white band
K 55
Two bright green bands
Entire coupling bright green
N 80
One red band
C 95
One brown band
Entire coupling brown
P 110
one white band
Entire coupling white
Entire coupling red
Table 12.A - API Casing Colour Coding

A coloured strip three inches wide will be painted on the coupling and a three inches wide
stripe on the pipe body within 24 of the end of the coupling.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
129 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
12.1.1. Casing Check List

Within a reasonable time prior to the beginning of the casing operation, the Company Drilling
and Completion Supervisor and the Drilling Contractor's Toolpusher shall physically check
the availability on the rig of all materials necessary to operations. The following check list
may be used as a guideline.
a)
Casing joints, enough for planned depth with 5-10% excess or a min. of 10 joints.
b)
Float equipment (float shoe, float collar, stage collar back-up are recommended).
c)
Casing compound.
d)
Thread lock compound.
e)
Solvent to clean casing threads.
f)
Centralisers, scratchers, stop collars and nails as per centralisation program.
g)
API casing drift (special Teflon drift is required for CRA casing).
h)
Wellhead equipment (casing spool, slips, packing, wear bushing, etc.) with back-up.
i)
Cementing plug set with back-up.
j)
Casing circulating head (swedge) with thread consistent with casing in use and backup.
k)
Cementing head (multiplugs with indicating flag).
l)
Casing power tong with back-up and power unit.
m)
Casing manual tongs.
n)
Casing slip-type elevator and spider.
o)
Casing single joint elevator.
p)
Casing hand-set rotary slips.
q)
Casing thread protectors (klampons).
r)
Cement.
s)
Water.
t)
Mud volume (also considering the case of a displacement without returns).
u)
Cement additives.
v)
Diatomite, bentonite or whatever needed if light slurry should be mixed.
w)
Chemicals to prepare spacers, if required.
x)
Inner stinger and centraliser, if required.
y)
Handling equipment (pick up slings, manila rope, etc.).
z)
Torque monitoring system (required for Corrosion Resistant Alloy casing or 7" casing).
aa)
Casing stabbing guide (for premium connections and production casing string).
bb)
HP hose or chicksan line for circulating or reciprocating casing (minimum 15m length).
cc)
Pick-up the casing unit.
dd)
Dope applicator (for Corrosion Resistant Alloy and production casing string).
ee)
Special handling equipment (nylon pick up slings, wooden cover for pipe rack and Vdoor, etc.) required when Corrosion Resistant Alloy casing should be run.
ff)
Casing suspension equipment (surface, mudline, subsea).
12.1.2. Preparation For Casing Running And Cementing

1)
A non-destructive test (NDT) on the casing shall be carried out at a service contractors
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)
130 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
2)
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
workshop or at the Companys Operating Base.

Casing shall be accurately measured and drifted. Each joint shall be drifted with on API
drift or a specially built drift in case of non-standard casing.
The joints will be counted and each joint numbered.
The joints to be excluded from the string will be clearly marked. A special mark for
defective joints will be used and specified in the manifest for back loading.
Crossover joint thread connections should be drifted and checked for thickness and
correct thread type.
Threads should be cleaned with a high pressure stream of water or an evaporating
solvent such as Varsol, otherwise manually cleaned on API connections.. Diesel left in
the thread roots can prevent the thread compound from forming an effective seal.
Casing shall be visually inspected to check it is not damaged by hooks used in the box
and pin ends while handling.
The box thread of the casings should be greased on the rack. API modified thread
compound (torque transmission factor = 1) shall be used. table 12.b shows the friction
indices for various thread compounds.
The float equipment and casing accessories will be inspected.
The shoe will be made up on the pipe rack using a thread locking compound.
The collar should be made up on the box end of the pipe on the rig floor. Install blank
thread protectors on the box ends of shoe joints.
The joints between shoe and collar couplings should be loose otherwise spare
couplings should be ordered to provide a means of thread locking both sides of the
couplings.
The centralisers should be made up on pipe rack as per the programme.
Wellhead equipment will be inspected, checking all dimensions.
Ensure that the cement plugs are compatible with the inside diameter of the casing
string.
Casing power tongs and associated equipment shall be visually inspected to ensure it
is of proper size and condition.
The drill line shall be cut and/or slipped prior to running casing, regardless of its
condition.
Links, elevators, hook assembly and drawwork brakes shall be inspected by Magnaflux
prior to running heavy strings.
Make sure that the mud pumps are in good mechanical condition and fitted with proper
size liners. Verify that shear pins are the correct size and are installed in the pump
relief valve.
Verify the mud pumps volumetric efficiency to ascertain the practical value of
litres/stroke during displacement.
Check the correct operation of the pumps stroke counters.
The cementing unit should be overhauled a few days in advance of requirement to
reduce the risk of mechanical/hydraulic failure during cementing operations.
Cement lines, silos, surge tank, air compressor should be checked.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
131 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
1)
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Good practice when unloading cement is to blow the first few sacks of cement through
the lines in order to prevent moisture contaminated cement from collecting in the
tanks. Off-loaded cement should be blown into empty, clean tanks.
If possible, avoid storing cement for long periods. Alternate tank usage systematically
and check them. Cement will pack when stored for a long periods and it should be
aerated for half hour once a week.
To prevent condensation in the cement tanks and lines, pressure should be maintained
on the system at all times. This will prevent breathing which can lead to condensation.
The Company Drilling and Completion Supervisor is directly responsible for the proper
inventory of cement and additives required before each job.
It is necessary to send a sample of cement, mud, barite and mixing water to the
Company Drilling Office where it shall be tested. Check the drill water for chloride
content, calcium and pH.
Prepare graph, one with casing weight in mud versus depth and the other with steel
displacement versus depth. A copy of these graphs must be given to the Driller and to
the Mud Engineer.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
132 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
AGIP Iglea (API 5A2 Modified )

Bestolife 270
Houghton Stap Pb 6
Houghton Joint N. 1
Jet-Lube Tef Kote (made in UK)
Jet-Lube API Modified (made in UK)
Jet-Lube Polar (made in UK)
Molykote HSC (MS)
Shell API Modified Compound
Shell France Modified Thread Compound
Shell Myrina S 7715
Shell Lub 179 A
Shell Lub 179 B
Techlube TL 60 Zn
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Baker Seal
Bestolife Honey-Koat
BP Energrease AS 13
BP AS 11
Houghton Stap Zn 6
Jet-Lube 21
Jet-Lube Kopr-Kote (made in UK)
Jet-Lube TF-15 (made in UK)
Jet-Lube TF-25 (made in UK)
Jet-Lube TF-65 Pb (made in UK)
Jet-Lube TL-60 Z 15 (made in UK)
Liquid O-Ring 104
Research Laboratories API Modified HP 300
Shell HP API Modified (Shell Oil Co. Code 72732)
Shell HP API Modified (Shell Canada Ltd Code 504-599)
Shell HP (Japan)
Techlube API Modified Thread Compound
Techlube TL 65 Pb
Thredkote 706
Thredkote 709
0,60
0,70
0,75
0,80
0,70
0,70
0,85
0,90
0,80
0,70
0,80
0,70
0,85
0,80
0,80
0,85
0,70
0,70
0,85
0,75
Jet-Lube SS 30 (made in UK)

Molykote HSC
Shell S 982
1,15
1,20
1,30
Bakerlok (Thread Locking Compound)

Gelokote T 7.285 (Thread Locking Compound)
Halliburton Weld-A (Thread Locking Compound)
Thread Lock (Thread Locking Compound)
1,60
0,70
0,90
0,60
Table 12.B - Relative Friction Indices for Various Thread compounds
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
133 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
12.1.3. Installation Patterns (For Mechanical Cementing Aids)

The selection of the proper installation pattern for mechanical cementing aids i.e. centralises,
scratchers, turbolisers, etc. is essential to optimise casing running and cementing results.
Cementing aids and their installation pattern are a function of operational conditions and
cementing objectives. Because of these variable factors, pattern philosophy is different from
case to case. The Drilling Programme must specify type, quantity and installation pattern of
mechanical cementing pieces, with due consideration to eventual modifications after caliper
log evaluation.
The following cases described below are shown in figure 12.a and figure 12.b
Case I
The simplest and most practical is the installation of centralisers directly over stop collars.
Installation on the racks is advisable as it saves time. This pattern is not recommended in
1 "
close-tolerance conditions, i.e. saves 7" rig casing in an 8 /2 hole.
Case II
In close-tolerance conditions, the centralisers should be positioned between two stop collars.
This pattern may be installed on the rack.
Case III
In this alternate close-tolerance pattern, the centralisers are installed between a stop collar
and the casing coupling.
This pattern allows limited centraliser travel and requires only one stop collar per centraliser,
reducing equipment cost. Installation should not be performed on the rack.
Case IV
Centralisers can be installed over the casing coupling but this reduces annular flow and the
positive stand-off provided by the casing coupling and requires extra rig time.
Weatherford do not recommend this pattern for close-tolerance conditions or where ST-I
and/or SP-I bows are used.
Post Plug Pattern
This pattern (Refer to figure 12.b) is recommended throughout the entire cement column to
promote improved cement-to-formation bonding in strings where casing can be reciprocated
in 30 to 40ft cycles. The post-plug pattern uses at least one centraliser per joint and free-tomove scratchers, separated by stop collars installed approximately 10ft (3m) apart.
The Modified Post-Plug pattern requires two centralisers per joint in conjunction with multiple
scratchers and stop collars placed 5ft (1.5m) apart. Wellbore wipers can replace the
scratchers for particular applications.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
134 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
The following codes will be used to describe the number of centralisers per casing:
1C: one centraliser per joint

2C: two centralisers per joint
3C: three centralisers per joint.
The following codes will be used to indicate the centralisers spacing:
C1: one centraliser each joint

C2: one centraliser every two joints
C3: one centraliser every three joints.
Example: 2C3 = two centraliser every three joints.

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
The use of spiral centralisers is recommended in each of the patterns where closetolerance conditions exist.
Alternate left/right handed spiral centralisers are used in special applications e.g.
liners, deviated wells, production strings, improvement of hydraulic displacement, etc..
For open hole intervals, spiral bow type centralisers will be used unless otherwise
specified. Straight type bows will be used for wash-out sections, unconsolidated
formations, etc.
Rigid type centralisers (Positive) are never allowed to enter open hole intervals.
In deeper wells, where high-rating casing equipment is used, Positive type centralisers
OD for free passage through clamp's slips should be considered. If not applicable,
spring bows are recommended and also in casing to casing intervals.
Maximise centralisation when special equipment/tools/zone are predicted i.e. stage
tools, liner hanger, ECIP, GOC, WOC, etc.
Special CRC stop collars, (without nails) are essential for CRA (Corrosion Resistant
Alloys) casing.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
135 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
CASE I:
Over stop collar
CASE III:
Between coupling
and stop collar
CASE IV:
CASE II:
Over coupling
Between
stop collars
Figure 12.A - Casing Installation Patterns
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
Post Plug Pattern
136 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
2CPP
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
2CPPM
Modified Post Plug Pattern
Figure 12.B - Casing Installation Patterns (Cont)
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
137 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
12.1.4. Preliminary Operations

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
After open hole log, a trip to bottom is recommended to condition the hole and mud.
The Mud Engineer shall check and, if necessary, adjust the mud properties. Plastic
viscosity, yield strength and weight shall be kept as low as possible.
There is a difference between the driller's and logging depths, strapping in or out of the
drill string shall be considered.
Check the weather forecast to ensure conditions be such as to allow safe operations.
Replace the upper pipe rams with the correct size of rams for the casing to be run. A
pressure test of the bonnet and rams seals shall be performed when the pipe rams are
changed.
Retrieve the wear bushing.
Do not lay down the BHA unless unavoidable. Before running 7" casing, break-out
BHA and 5" DP. While waiting on cement lay down the BHA and 5" DP.
From the caliper log determine the correct volume of slurry, spacers. Centralisation
pattern to be used.
Verify that the differential pressure between the slurry and mud does not exceed the
casing collapse rating. Also make sure that the density of slurry and the planned top of
cement do not cause losses of circulation and/or gas migration while waiting on
cement. The Company Drilling Engineer, if on site, shall assist the Company Drilling
and Completion Supervisor.
The Company Drilling and Completion Supervisor, Company Drilling Engineer (if on
site) and Cementing Operator shall conduct individually, calculations for the cementing
job prior to running the casing. The figures/calculations shall be compared in order to
ascertain final cement, volumes, etc.
Calculate the maximum allowable overpull while running casing.
Landing joints are to be inspected and selected to avoid interference with wellhead.
The coupling must be minimum a 2m from casing hanging point.
Do not start running the casing without the Cementing Operator being on site. The
operator will start the unit pumps and check for system malfunctions.
Check the length of elevator links several days in advance for fitness with equipment
i.e. spider, circulating/cementing heads, circulating casing packer.
Before commencing of the job, the Toolpusher, Driller, Cementing Operator, Mud
Engineer and Mud Logging Operator shall be fully informed of the cementing
procedure and given the following data:
Total amount of lead and tail cement slurries.
Volumes, density and composition of spacers.
Calculated top of tail and lead slurries based on hole conditions.
Desired density of lead and tail slurries.
Required amount of mixing water for both slurries (fresh or sea water to be duly
noted by all concerned).
Total amount of cement to be used.
Required volumes of additives for both slurries.
Estimated setting time of the cement.
Internal volume of casing from top to float collar and number of rig pump strokes
to bump the plugs.
Volume of casing from float collar to float shoe and number of rig pump strokes
for overdisplacement only.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
138 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
15)
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Maximum allowable displacement rate compatible with the MAASP.

Install centralisers as per the Drilling Programme when the casing is on the pipe rack,
in order to avoid time wasting during casing running.
Check shoe and collar integrity.
Test the sealing adapter 30"-20" shoe for perfect fit.
Record initial pit levels to establish a reference volume in order to detect any abnormal
condition while running the casing.
Arrange an appropriate length of high pressure flexible hose for casing string
circulating down and/or reciprocating.
Centre the travelling block with the rotary table to facilitate casing running and hanging.
Check subs, crossovers, stage collar, ECIP for correct threads, dimensions, etc.
Visual inspect the casing internal surface on the pipe rack to ensure that all joints are
free from foreign matter.
12.1.5. Running Procedure

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
A circulation sub, fitting the casing thread, equipped with a WECO connection, shall be
readily available on rig floor at all times during casing running.
Pick up the shoe joint and remove the blank thread protector at V-door. Lower the joint
through the rotary and visually verify for back flow. Fill the joint with mud, then pick up
to check for flow through.
3
5
Generally a float collar shall be run two joints above the shoe in 13 /8" and 9 /8" casing
and three joints above a 7" shoe.
30" conductor pipe, after drilling of 36" hole, and 20" surface casing shall be cemented
using a drill pipe inner string with a sealing sleeve adapter.
Use thread lock compound on all the connections on and below the float collar (or
landing collar).
Pick up the collar joint and remove the blank thread protector at the V-door. Make up
the joint and fill with mud. Pick up and check the shoe and collar for flow through.
After running 6 joints, make up the circulating head and test the float equipment
pumping at the maximum displacement rate. Record pressure losses due to collar and
shoe at various flow rates.
When running Buttress casing, make up the first 10 joint connections to the reference
triangle (do not consider the joints between shoe and collar since the torque
transmission factor of thread lock compound is not the same value as casing dope).
Record the average torque required for these first joints and use it for the remaining
part of the string. The torque value shall then be checked every 10-20 joints and
adjusted, if necessary.
When running other threads, the make up torque should be in accordance with the
manufacturer's specifications.
Rotary slips with safety clamp and side door elevators may be used up to a weight
equal to 60% of the rating for the elevators. Beyond this weight, use slip power
elevator and spider.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
10)
11)
Note:
139 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Note:
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Slip power elevator and spider shall always be used when running casing
in open hole).
Stop the block before setting the spider and then slowly slack off pipe weight to
minimise pipe slippage, notching or crushing.
The maximum casing running speed should be calculated for the well specific mud
properties and formation integrity. As a rule of thumb, running speed should never
exceed 0.6m/sec. (20sec/joint) inside casing and 0.3m/sec. (40sec/joint) in open hole.
For 7" casing the running speed shall not exceed 0.2m/sec. (1 joint every
minute).
Inform the Driller that speed variation is a cause of surge and possible mud loss, so it
is particularly important to run the casing in as smooth a manner as possible.
12)
13)
14)
Fill up the casing after every joint and completely every 10 joints. If running a liner, fill
up the running string at each stand.
While running the casing compare the actual string weight and pit level, with theoretical
values previously plotted, in order to detect any possible abnormal condition.
Intermediate circulation is generally not necessary, however it may be advisable under
the following circumstances:
When the weight indicator shows excessive dragging or a tendency to stick.
When an excessive amount of mud cake, cuttings or shale is expected.
When it is anticipated that returns will be lost if excessively high pump pressure
is required to break circulation at bottom.
At the previous casing shoe.

Circulation should start at a very low pump rate increasing gradually to the maximum
displacement rate. Record the circulating pressures at the various rates.
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
When installing a production casing string it is recommended to place a short joint near
the pay zone to aid in checking depths with casing collar locator (CCL) during later
logging operations.
During casing running, plot the casing weight and pit levels on the graph (described
earlier) and compare them with the theoretical values previously plotted to detect any
possible abnormal condition.
At the previous casing shoe depth fill up the string completely and circulate the volume
inside the casing. Check levels and start circulation at a very low pump rate increasing
gradually up to the maximum allowable displacement rate. Record the circulating
pressures at the various flow rates.
Space out the casing string in order to have the cementing head at a convenient
height. On the other hand, ensure that the last casing collar is not across the hanging
point.
With the casing at TD circulate the total hole volume, following the procedure in step
17).
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
1)
Note:
140 OF 234
During circulation, check the levels and any bottom cushion.

At the end of circulation, record the pressure with the estimated displacement rate.
During the final circulation and the following cementing job phases, hang the casing on
the travelling block and do not leave it on the rotary table clamp.
In particular instances the Post Plug technique should be used in order
to reciprocate the casing string.
12.1.6. Casing Operations With A Top Drive

With the introduction of 500 tons bails and adequately rated swivel, the Top Drive is rated at
500 tons for casing operations. Longer bails (132 or 144) must be used to allow clearance
for the casing elevator under the torque wrench in the pipe handler.
Also clearance for the cementing head must be taken into consideration when determining
casing bails length. By attaching a short piece of hose to the saver sub in the pipe handler,
the casing can be filled while lowering by using the remotely controlled kelly cock to start and
stop the calculated filling flow. If desired, casing can be run conventionally using the block
and hook by swinging the Top Drive aside. Very long bails must be used to prevent the block
from contacting the Top Drive dolly.
1
It is recommended to prepare landing/circulating heads (4 /2" If Box connections) connected

3
5
directly to top drive for 13 /8", 9 /8" and 7" casing, in order to facilitate circulating down,
casing reciprocation, casing retrieve with circulation, etc.
Circulating Casing Packers compatible with top drive systems are available in the market
(i.e. Weatherford, PBL, CTC, TAM, etc.).
12.2.
CRA CASING OPERATIONS

Pre-job meetings for running CRA (Corrosion Resistant Alloys) must be held between the
Eni-Agip Drilling Representative, the Thread Inspector and the Casing Make up Supervisor
to discuss the procedures and responsibilities of the operations and the make up criteria as
detailed in (STAP-A-1-M-1002).
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
141 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
12.2.1. Preliminary operations

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
Prepare and double check the tally list.

CRA casing should be set on racks to allow enough space for a 360 revolution for
cleaning and inspection.
Ensure drift mandrels conform to API requirements or the manufacturers specification
(Teflon drifts are recommended).
Always have clean thread protectors on the connections when moving or handling
pipe.
Have red and yellow paint available for marking rejected and repairable pipe.
Ensure the accuracy of the torque/time/turn recorder when running CRA casing.
Always use a stabbing guide to assure the connection is stabbed with no thread or seal
damage.
Ensure that the correct sized and serviceable tubular safety clamp is available for first
few joints.
Protect the areas CRA casing when is moved with wooden cover (V door, ramps,
rack, etc.).
The use of antifriction spray is recommended in conjunction with Modified API Dope.
Ensure the dope is thoroughly mixed.
Special CRC stop collars (without nails) are imperative for CRA casing as well as non
marking jaws on the power tongs.
12.2.2. Handling and running CRA tubulars

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
Do not use lift hooks to pick-up CRA pipe. The joints should be lifted to the V door by
nylon slings.
The elevator must be placed on the pipe only after the joint is made-up.
A safety clamp will be securely placed around the joint located in the slips to prevent
slippage (X-line or flush coupling).
Keep thread protectors on the Pin and Box until stabbing to avoid loose scale or debris
interfering with the make-up.
The use of an integral back-up power tong is recommended with a connection
monitoring system. The equipment must be capable of providing an instantaneous
view of torque versus time and turn, which provides a hard copy. A dump valve must
be used to prevent over-torque.
Final make-up of the pipe will be at a low speed only and held for +/- 3 seconds to
ensure the plateau effect on the time graph.
Any premium connections failing or exceeding the required make-up criteria shall be
rejected. A maximum of three attempts only must be made.
Threads, protectors and compound must be absolutely clean, free of grit, scale, or
powder.
For premium connections, the initial spin-in should be about 10rpm and the final makeup between 1 to 3rpm.
A dope applicator and antifriction spray are recommended for use on production
strings designed for gas well.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
Notes
Provided with relevant power
unit.
Back-Up System
To avoid bending and shearing

forces on casing.
Controlled Make-Up System To automatic drop the speed of
the tong before reaching the
shoulder.
Non Marking Jaws
To eliminate die marks.
General Handling Equipment Single joint elevator
Lifting sub
Nylon lifting sling
Elevator
Rotary handslip
Spider elevator
Stabbing guide
Manual chain tong
Safety clamp
Strap Wrench
For hand make-up
Pick-Up And Lay-Down
On-shore wells
Machine
Drift
Aluminium or Teflon
Klepto Thread Protector
Computer Controlled MakeUp Service
Lubricant Applicator
Single Joint Compensator
142 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Item
Casing Power Tong
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Selection/ Specification
Selection shall be based on
desired make-up torque and
casing size.
It is a casing power tong optional.
Selection shall be based on

casing size and weights
Air inflatable thread protectors or Selection on casing sizes and
similar.
thread types.
Recommended for CRA. casing.
It provides positioning control
and weight compensation while
stabbing.
Suggested for CRA. casing.

Suggested for CRA. casing.
Table 12.C - Casing Running Equipment
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
143 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
12.3.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
CEMENTING AND DISPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
12.3.1. Single Or First Stage

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
Line up to the rig pumps. Break circulation slowly. When it has been determined that
full returns have been established, gradually increase the pump rate and circulate total
hole volume. Record the pressures at the various flowrates. At the end of circulation,
record the pressure with estimated displacement rate.
During circulation monitor pit levels, bottoms-up mud properties and eventual shows.
After bottom circulation, line up the cement head to the cementing manifold.
Check the cementing lines and connect the cementing manifold to the rig mud pumps.
All lines of the cementing manifold shall be flushed with water and pressure tested to
5,000psi prior to cementing.
The Mud Engineer shall record initial pit levels. He shall be present at the mud pits
during the whole cementing and displacement operations reporting any loss on
returns, pertinent facts and data.
Pump the spacer. Unless the effective mud density required to control formation
pressure dictates otherwise, all cement jobs shall be flushed with a water spacer. The
spacer volume shall be equivalent to, circa three minutes of contact time. The use of
other particular spacers, related to mud weight and system in use, will be specified, in
the drilling programme (contact time, compatibility with cement slurry, etc.).
In all cementing operations, a top and bottom plug shall be utilised unless otherwise
specified in the Cementing Programme, 30 and 20 casing will be cemented through
an inner string.
The use of non rotating PDC drillable plugs are recommended to enable further drilling
phases.
In advance to the cementing job, the water and cement shall be checked to ascertain
that the chemical characteristics are the same as the samples used in the pilot tests.
Mix the cement to the required slurry weight and have the weight checked regularly. A
pressurised mud balance is recommended in order to reduce any air entering the
system to a negligible volume. The use of this tool provides advantages:
A fluid density value that is virtually the same as that under actual downhole
conditions.
The correct water/cement ratio. It must be noted that changing the W/C ratio,
means the amount of additives in the slurry also change.
When mixing cement, samples of slurry shall be collected in numbered containers,
taken at the start, middle and end of each type of slurry. Also take water, mixing water
samples and one sample of dry cement from each tank used.
For the slurry recipe follow the Cementing Programme.
Leave the mixing tube full of the required weight slurry at the conclusion of mixing to
avoid the possibility of pumping diluted cement or possibly water into the casing before
the top plug is released.
Flush the cement from the lines prior to releasing the top plug.
The Cementing Operator shall personally release the top plug and the Company
Drilling and Completion Supervisor shall personally witness the process.
Switch over to the rig pumps. The cement pumping unit shall be ready, waiting to take
over in case of any malfunction or in the event pressure becomes excessive for the rig
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)
24)
25)
26)
27)
28)
29)
30)
144 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
17)
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
pumps.
Displace the cement with mud at the maximum permissible rate and surface pressure,
unless otherwise stated in the Cementing Programme.
Slow the pumps, if there is a loss of returns during the displacement, to regain
circulation.
If returns cannot be regained, continue to displace the cement at the lowest
permissible rate (unless otherwise advised) record the returns.
Stop displacement only in the event the pressure exceeds 70% of the casing burst
pressure or 5,000psi, whichever is least.
Reduce the flow rate at the end of operation to avoid any sudden pressure surge when
bumping the plug.
Bump the plug, pressure up to conduct the casing pressure test. Release the pressure
gradually as soon as possible to avoid the microannulus effect.
The bumping pressure values are always given in the Drilling Programme.
Should the plug not bump, never overdisplace more than half the shoe truck volume
(between collar and shoe).
Check for back flow to ascertain if the float equipment is holding.
If the float equipment fails, shut-in the well by closing standpipe manifold a period at
least long enough for thickening. Monitor the pressure gauge so that required pressure
can be maintained by bleeding excessive pressure periodically.
In this case, the pressure remaining must not exceed the observed differential
pressure between the mud and cement.
The displacement procedure for 30" CP and 20" surface casing is as follows:
The displacement volume should be approximately 1 bbl less than the theoretical
volume.
Check for returns. If the floating equipment is holding back pressure, pick up the
stinger, circulate and retrieve inner string. If floating equipment is not holding the
back pressure, pump the volume bleed back plus 1 bbl, fill up the annulus
(required), hold the pressure on the inner string and wait on cement.
Keep the annulus under control to be sure that seals are holding the pressure.
At the end of this surface casing cementing job, carefully wash the annulus
between the CP and the surface casing to at least 5m below the seabed, in order
to allow well abandoning operations making the seabed free from any
obstructions.
Record all mixing, displacing and bumping operations on a pressure recorder.
Consider the option of reciprocating the casing during and after the cementing job to
maximise the bonding performance.
ARPO
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
145 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
p g p
and Slurry
Mud
Top
Cementing Plug
Plug Releasing Pin
Bottom
Cementing Plug
Plug Releasing Pin
Slurry
Plug Releasing Pin
Spacer
Original
Mud
Float
Collar
Centralisers
Float
Shoe
Figure 12.C - Typical One-Stage Primary Cement Job
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
146 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Displacing
Displacing
End of Job
Plug Releasing Pin Out
Displacement
Fluid
Figure 12.D - Typical One-Stage Cement Job(Cont)
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
147 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
12.3.2. Dual Or Second Stage

1)
2)
Note:
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
The appropriate position of the stage tool in the casing string is always given in the
Drilling Programme.
Drop the bomb (opening plug) immediately after the first stage cement job according
with floating equipment. Record the opening time.
In relation to the drift angle of a directional well, mud density and mud
rheological properties, heavier bombs may be selected.
Open the stage collar. Follow the manufacturer's procedure for the stage tool opening
pressure and approximate bomb landing time. If difficulty is experienced in opening the
stage collar occurs, re-check the pumping circuit and relevant valves before a final
decision is made to reduce the tension on DV sleeves by slacking-off weight of the
hook.
With the stage collar opened, start circulation with a low pump rate, keeping the mud
level under control. Increase the pump rate only when it is certain that no cuttings or
cement contamination will cause bridges and compromise the circulation due to
fracturing below the stage collar. Circulate a volume equal to the total open hole
capacity from the stage tool to surface, checking the eventual excess cement slurry
returns.
During circulation and after bottom's up, record the pressures at each different flow
rates. The bottoms up must be analysed with a gas detector, if the are gas-cut keep
circulating until normal again. If necessary, wait on cement for the first stage cement
slurry.
Prepare for the second stage cement job as per the Cementing Programme.
Perform the second stage operation as soon as the cement setting time of the first
stage is complete (at least twice the thickening time). A Lab only test is recommended.
Arrange the by-pass manifold at the rig floor with double lines (pumping and reversingout).
Keep the casing in tension with the slip elevator as required by casing hanging
calculations (Refer to the Drilling Programme).
Prepare the wellhead (with partially made up bolts) and BOP lifting system to quickly
hang the casing string after the second stage cement job.
With the mud well balanced, insert the closing plug into the cementing head. Check
the stop pin, indicating flag and the circulation manifold.
Pump the first cushion and pump the cement slurry.
Launch the closing plug and verify its release.
Displace the slurry with a pump rate in accordance with the Cementing Programme
and previous circulation tests. Make sure that the hydraulics of annulus are correctly
considered to avoid fracturing (if a stage tool-packer is not provided).
Configure the surface mud system to recover the excess cement slurry, spacer,
contaminated mud.
Close the stage collar with the pressure advised by the manufacturers instructions.
After pressure testing, gradually bleed off the pressure.
Wash through all the inlets in the wellhead and BOP stack with water.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
Dropping
opening bomb
Displacing cement
for second stage
Stage tool
closed
Closing
Plug
Opening
Bomb
Stage
Collar
Seal-Off
Plate
148 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Circulating before
first stage
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
First-stage
Plug
Float
Collar
Centralizers
Float
Shoe
Figure 12.E - Two-Stage Cement Job (single plug system)
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
Shut-off
Plug
149 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Displacing cement
for first stage
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Dropping
opening bomb
Displacing cement
for second stage
Stage tool
closed
Closing
Plug
Opening
Bomb
Stage
Collar
First-stage
By-pass Plug
Shut-off
Baffle
By-pass
Baffle
Float
Collar
Centralizers
Float
Shoe
Figure 12.F - Two Stage Cement Job (double plug system)
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
150 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
12.3.3. Double Stage Cementing In Deep Wells

Casing hanging after the second stage, while Waiting On Cement (WOC)
When a cement job programme does not require the return of the slurry up to surface, the
hanging is performed after the second stage cement slurry thickening time, then it is
possible to disconnect the BOP stack maintaining annulus control.
In deep wells, where the casing string must be cemented to surface, it may become difficult
to work on the wellhead when the slurry is nearly hardened, for the following reasons:
The casing is often out of centre and it is difficult and time consuming to insert
the slips.
The slurry at surface prevents movement of the casing when trying to centre it.
Even though they can be placed in their recess, the may slips only lean against
the casing without tension, and therefore the casing might be released.
In case of a microannulus forming or gas channelling through the cement slurry,
pressure in the annulus prevents BOP stack lifting.
Therefore, although this routine complies with safety rules, it does not guarantee a perfect
casing hanging operation. To overcome this potential problem, the use of a stage toolpacker is recommended to ensure an annular seal and/or the casing hanging operation has
been completed before slurry setting.
Casing hanging before the second stage waiting on cement.
This procedure offers the following advantages:
The slurry is still in the fluid state and it is possible to hang the casing.
Centring operations are easier because it is still possible to move the string
sideways.
The BOP stack can be nippled up because primary well control is assured as
long as the thickening time has not elapsed.
Since it is necessary to nipple up the BOP stack before cement slurry setting, the nippling
operations would have to be carried out quickly.
However, this technique is discouraged. As the primary annulus control is missing when the
operational time exceeds the programmed or when the slurry thickening time was not
precisely predicted. However, secondary control is also limited as the BOP is lifted during
WOC. In fact, several incidents have occurred which entailed a loss in rig time and increased
costs.
Casing hanging before the second stage cementing
The points discussed above show there is an opportunity to hang the casing before the
second stage cement job, adopting the use of a special designed base flange or a modified
1
3
casing spool with four 4 /16" outlets instead of the normal two 1 /4" ones).
In this case, well control, which is impossible during lifting of the BOP stack, is implemented,
since the annular hydraulic conditions are restored after the mud circulation through the
Stage Collar. Therefore, the BOP stack is lifted and the casing is hung in a controlled
condition.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
151 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
This operation can be performed without hurry or worry over premature cement hardening,
use of quicker slurries, the lengthening of operating times, mistakes in lab tests, etc.
It is also possible to set the slips without problems or obstacles due to the presence of the
slurry at surface.
There is the further advantage of being able to apply overpull to the casing even if the
second stage cement job has not given the proper results.
There are no casing movements during the cement slurry hardening time, therefore the
possibility that a microannulus is formed is very remote and hydraulic sealing and cement job
quality are improved.
The practical advantages are as follows:
12.4.
The base flange and the first casing spool, specially designed with larger side
outlets, provide slurry displacement with practically no pressure losses.
The slips are inserted correctly around the casing holding tension.
There is no risk that, casing hang off may be prevented by not being centred.
Nippling up operations are carried out at ease and, on the average, quicker, with
reduced possibility of mistakes being made due to haste.
The well is under total control, especially when the slurry hydrostatic load
decreases during WOC.
There is greater certainty of obtaining hydraulic sealing during the second stage
cement job and during well production life, as the slurry sets while the casing is
already under tensile load and is steady.
It is possible to use accelerated slurries when gas bearing layers have been
drilled. The gas migration may possibly be prevented by subjecting the annulus
to pressure, since the BOP stack is always available during WOC.
It is possible to displace the slurry through a modified flange with returns to the
pits.
MUDLINE SUSPENSION PROCEDURES
12.4.1. Cementing 20" Surface Casing (With Inner Strings)

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Run all the 20" casing in the hole and stab on the landing ring.
Run the inner string into the casing down to the shoe.
3
Run the two 2 /8" tubing strings into the 20-30 annulus. Tag the landing ring and
wash out with sea water. At the same time, make up the cementing line and fill-up the
20" casing 5" DPs annulus with sea water. Break circulation and check if the stinger O
rings are sealed.
Pressure test the cementing line and cement the 20" casing as per the Cementing
Programme.
When contaminated mud is being circulated out, start washing with sea water through
3
the 2 /8" tubing and continue the cementing job or the displacing through the inner
string.
Once the cementing job is complete, check for back-flow from the inner string and pull
out of hole.
3
Pull the 2 /8" tubing strings and rig-up the 20" circulating head.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
2)
3)
152 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
1)
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Unscrew the running tool with right hand torque. Open the wash-out ports and wash
the mudline hanger (MLH) through the wash-out ports.
Screw-back the running tool back up with the correct make-up torque.
Pressure test the seals at a low pressure.
12.4.2. Cementing Casings With Plugs

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
12.5.
Cement the casing in a single or in dual stage as per previous sections.

Disconnect the cementing line at the rig floor, keeping the cementing head connected
to the running string.
To assure that there is no cement in the annulus above the running tool, follow the
procedure listed below for hangers equipped with wash ports.
Record the hook load to support the weight of the running string. Adjust the
tension to the free point (neutral at the hanger threads).
Rotate the running string to open the wash ports in the hanger.
Reconnect the cementing line to the cementing head and circulate out all excess
slurry. Continue until the annulus is clean.
Disconnect the cementing line.

Rotate the running string, in the opposite direction, measuring the downward
movement of the running string.
Energise the seal. Reconnect the cementing line and pressure test the casing and
running tool.
POST-CEMENTING OPERATIONS
1)
If mechanical problems (lost circulation, etc.) is experienced during the cementing job,
or any doubt arises about cementing results a temperature survey or CBL/CET shall
be run in order to verify the cement job quality.
Temperature survey shall be run after 8 hours WOC and a CBL/CET shall be run after
a minimum of 24 hours WOC (48 hours are recommended).
2)
During WOC the following preparations shall be performed to set casing on the slips:
Prepare slings to hang off the BOP stack.
Prepare the wellhead equipment required for slip setting and flanging up.
After WOC proceed as follows:
Disconnect the kill and choke lines.

Disconnect the flange required to set the slips.
Raise and hang off the BOP stack.
Set the casing on the slips with the desired tension (Refer to the Drilling
Programme), making sure that the slips are properly set.
Cut and retrieve the casing.
Nipple up the new casing spool.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
5)
12.6.
153 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
4)
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
When drilling out a liner hanger, cement and floating equipment, with a stage tool, the
following precautions shall be taken:
While drilling cement inside the casing, do not exceed 50rpm and 2-5t WOB.
While drilling the underlying formation and until the stabilisers are out of the
casing shoe, do not exceed 50-70rpm and keep low weight and torque on bit.
Unless an excessive amount of cement is left inside the casing, the cement could be
drilled out using a stabilised string.
With dual stage, run to the DV depth, drill out the collar, plug and bomb then
perform a DV casing test at the previous casing test pressure.
SQUEEZING
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
Note:
Set a Cement Retainer (CR) using wireline whenever possible to 5 to 10m above the
perforations. Correlate the CCL and GR to avoid setting the CR across a collar or
perforations.
Run the Setting Tool on drill pipe, apply 10 ton weight on the CR and try to circulate
testing the CR and the rubber seals (O rings) by pressurising up on the annulus. Pickup the stinger and test the surface lines from cementing unit to cementing head at
5,000psi.
3
Displace the pipe with 2m of water cushion.
Stab the stinger in and perform a feeding test, recording injection rates and relevant
pressures. Do not exceed fracture pressure.
Pick-up the stinger and mix and pump the slurry. The slurry design depends on the
feeding test results. In front and after the slurry, pump a cushion of treated water or
spacer.
Displace the first water cushion until it reaches the end of the pipe, then stop pumping
and rapidly stab the stinger in. With high density slurries, close the annular BOP with a
low pressure before stabbing the stinger in.
Monitor that a DP tool joint is not across the BOP annular rubber.
Apply a moderate squeeze pressure taking into consideration the increased hydrostatic
effect of the cement column.
Gradually increase downhole pressure to 500-1,000psi above the pressure required to
initiate the flow calculated with a residual cement column.
If pressure increases by pumping, proceed until the maximum pressure of 500 psi
below fracture pressure is reached. If no pressure increase is observed, adopt the
Hesitation Technique, pumping small amounts of slurry (just enough to determine if
the formation is feeding) and waiting a few minutes allowing for complete bleed-off.
Record a residual pressure.
Increase the pump pressure according to the increase in bleed off pressure, until the
maximum squeezing pressure is reached.
A high final squeeze pressure does not necessarily indicate a successful
squeeze.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
12.7.
154 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
11)
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
If the pressure reaches a high value, help the stinger seals by applying pressure on the
annulus.
Pick-up the stinger and reverse circulate out the excess cement. Record the
volume fluid taken back.
LINERS
12.7.1. Preliminary Preparations

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
A meeting shall be held with key personnel to discuss the detailed programme and
operational procedure.
Is recommended to make up the liner hanger system already assembly and test at the
Contractor's workshop including: running tool, pup joints, plug holder bushing, packer
extension, etc., checked, drifted and measured.
Under normal conditions, the liner will be hung with a 100 to 150m overlap into the
previous casing. If a smaller overlap is necessary due to a particular situation, it shall
never be less than 50m .
If the rat hole exceeds the overlap length, set a cement plug at a distance from the
liner shoe setting depth shorter than the overlap itself.
Strap the drill pipe as it is pulled out of the hole on the last trip before running the liner.
Separate the DC, BHA and extra DP stands in the derrick according to the calculated
running string for easy checking and operation.
Drift the drill pipe and check the ID of all tools, subs, crossovers, pup joints of the
running string to ensure passage of the drill pipe pump down plug and for dropping ball
for hydraulic liner hanger.
Visually inspect all tools and equipment for damaged components, dents etc. Record
the shear pressure of all shear pins.
The liner hanger OD and packer extension sleeve shall be checked and the length
measured.
The liner cementing plug system (single or dual plugs) should have 1,500-2,000psi
shearing pressure to check the latch-in and verify exact displacement volume (pumps
volumetric efficiency knowledge which is important to have a correct final bump plug).
With a liner hanger assembly with a double plug cementing system, ensure the
appropriate cementing head with dual drill pipe darts is used.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
155 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
12.7.2. Running And Setting

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
Run the liner with the following operational procedure:

Check that the liner hanger slips operate properly and are undamaged prior to running
in the hole (mechanical type).
According to the liner hanger design being used, check the proper distance between
setting tool stinger and casing plug receptacle for the correct latch-in plugs.
Perform a circulating test at the liner hanger top to assure sealing of the packing
elements (O ring or V chevron).
Under no circumstance shall rotation be allowed to the running string ; use a
back-up tong for connection make-up, and lock the rotary table (mechanical type).
At every circulation point before hanger setting (previous casing shoe, open hole or
bottom), keep circulating pressure at maximum of 80% of hanger slips setting value
(hydraulic type).
Record the exact liner and DP string weights including drag (hook load down and up)
to calculate the exact neutral point for the setting tool release (10-15t bearing).
When the liner setting depth is reached, start reciprocating slowly. Break circulation
pumping very slowly (100-300lpm), then increase the flow rate to the desired value
(observe for pressure surges to avoid formation fracture) and condition the mud as per
the programme.
Remove the kelly, drop the setting ball, install the cementing head with the swivel (drill
pipe dart plug inserted) and indicating flag. Prepare the rig floor by-pass manifold with
double lines and valves for direct and reverse circulations.
After mud and hole conditioning, set the hanger following the procedures provided by
the manufacturer. If circulation time is greater than 60min, set the hydraulic hanger
before completing the circulation and with bottom's up above the liner head (minimum
circulating volume before dropping setting ball is the DP plus casing capacity).
Release the setting tool and pick up circa 3ft (1m) to ensure that it has released (never
pull the stinger out of the packing or dogs above the packer's extension sleeve).
For heavy liner or high angle wells, use a long stinger and packing (>3m) and packer
extension sleeve (>6m).
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
156 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
12.7.3. Cementing
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
Cement the liner as per the Cementing Programme. Excess cement slurry will be 20 %
of the caliper data volume, based on slurry return at the top of the liner. The slurry
must be batch-mixed.
Design a proper and compatible spacer to separate the drilling mud from the cement
slurry (for 150m of annulus with balanced weight spacer possibly with 8-10 minutes
contact's time).
Displace the cement with the cementing unit on shallow liners. Use the rig pumps for
deep liners.
If no shear of wiper plug is observed, do not bump the plug. Use the theoretical
displacement volume only.
3
Reduce the pump rate to 300-400l/min, 1-2m before the expected bump plug. Once
the theoretical volume has been displaced, if the plug does not bump, overdisplace a
2
maximum /3 of the shoe track volume (between the landing collar and the float shoe).
Bump the plug with 500-1000psi above the final displacement pressure. However, the
bumping plug value will be stated in the Drilling Programme.
Bleed off the pressure very slowly and check for back flow.
Pressurise approx. 300psi in order to check the correct sting out. Pick up the setting
tool and circulate at least twice the annulus capacity while moving the string.
Pull the setting tool.
In case of liner hanger equipped with a CPH packer, the following procedure has to be
followed:
a)
Pressurise to approx. 300psi in order to check the correct sting out.
b)
Pick up the setting tool, with activating dogs above the extension sleeve head,
and apply the appropriate weight to energise the CPH packer.
c)
Pick-up the setting tool above the extension sleeve and circulate at least twice
the annulus capacity.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
157 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
13.
LOGGING
13.1.
LOGGING WHILE DRILLING (LWD) CONSIDERATIONS
Many factors must be considered to economically justify the use of LWD.
The majority of cost savings are due to a rig time reduction associated with
wireline operations,
Conventional slick-line directional surveys and setup charges (particularly for
offshore wells).
Improved rates of penetration (ROP) when better survey accuracy and real-time
toolface data can be obtained
Reduced risk of a lost well or BHA due to borehole instability
High-profile exploratory wells where lwd is used for correlation, pressure
detection, to pick casing points, identify potential pay intervals for early
evaluation, or for insurance logging in the event that a wellbore may be lost.
Highly deviated and horizontal wells where obtaining pipe-conveyed (tlc) or
conventional wireline logs is extremely difficult or risky.
In situations where alternatives to MWD are risky or do not exist, LWD should
easily be justified when weighed against the potential risks of not using LWD
13.1.1. Advantages Of Using LWD

A neutron or density sensor in the BHA may help obtain the formation porosity and bulk
density values before the formation washes out.
A caliper on the LWD tool may also help to pinpoint formations where washout has occurred
and log quality is compromised.
Such a measurement can also be used to indicate borehole instability and help the driller
adjust mud properties appropriately
13.1.2. Onshore Planning
Due to the peculiarity and complexity of MWD/LWD operations, a very high degree of
collaboration is required between the Drilling & Completion Department specialist,
Subsurface Geologist Department specialist and Service Company Representative, in the
pre-job meeting for the operation to determine:
The most suitable tools.

Their positioning in the BHA
The drilling parameters to be used
If the stabilisers are correctly positioned in the BHA, according to the LWD tools
The maximum admissible flow through the LWD tools must not be exceeded,
otherwise substantial erosion damage will occur inside the tool.
Limiting the solid content in the mud in order not to exceed the LWD tools
limitations.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
158 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
13.1.3. Rig Planning

The drillers depth measurement should be of the utmost accuracy as is possible.
The ROP should allow the LWD data sampling as planned in the basis of the pre-job
meeting, in order to reach the LWD objectives.
It is important to highlight that the peculiarity and complexity of MWD/LWD operations
require a very high degree of liaison and collaboration among the Subsurface geologist,
Drilling & Completion supervisor and LWD Service Operator present at the wellsite during
the operations (during the rig site pre-job meeting) to verify/confirm:
Tool positioning in the BHA

The drilling parameters to be used
Stabiliser positioning in the BHA is correct, according to the LWD tools
The maximum admissible flow through the LWD tools must not be exceeded,
otherwise substantial erosion damage will occur inside the tool.
Limiting the solid content in the mud in order not to exceed the LWD tools
limitations.
13.1.4. Contractor Advanced Knowledge
Drilling mud characteristics (if oil or water basis mud, mud salinity, presence of
solids, etc..).
Drilling section interval.
ROP, deviation, type of BHA and bits.
Occurrence of overpressured levels or fractured intervals
The accurate measurement of the BHA length made by the drilling crew
The accurate measurement of the distance from the rotary table to the sea floor
on offshore rigs.
13.1.5. Rig Monitoring System Requirements

Radioactive sources must be used in LWD which are very similar to those used in wireline
logging. Equipment for monitoring mud radioactivity must be used on all jobs requiring
radioactive sources.
13.1.6. Shock Mechanisms That Can Cause Lwd Tool Failure:
Bit bounce (particularly in vertical holes, with tricone bits and in hard rock
environments);
Torsional shocks and stick-slip (commonly found in high angle wells and with
aggressive PDC bits run with too much weight).
Thinly bedded formation changes (bit and stabiliser in different lithologies)
Reaming (sudden releases of energy)
Drilling cement (unstabilised BHA in casing)
Under-gauge bit (stabiliser digging)
Stabilisers hanging on ledges or dog legs
Buckling of the BHA (through incorrect application of weight on bit)
13.1.7. Solutions To Shock Problems:
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
13.2.
159 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Change the weight on bit (in some cases briefly stopping the rotation),
Use downhole motors,
Adjust the flow rate,
Change the mud system/hydraulics,
Adopt the use of shock subs,
Add thrusters and roller reamers.
WIRELINE LOGGING

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
Prior to logging, the hole shall be circulated clean and the mud conditioned.
After logging and prior to running casing, a wiper trip shall be carried out to condition
the hole.
If there is a long logging period or before a RFT, an intermediate wiper trip shall be run
if deemed necessary by the Company Drilling and Completion Supervisor.
During wireline operations, the mud level shall be continuously monitored with the trip
tank, particularly, while pulling out logging tools.
Extreme caution shall be taken when the tools are run or pulled through casing shoes,
mudline suspension systems, wellheads, BOPs and rotary tables.
The Company Well site Geologist is responsible for log quality. The Company Drilling
and Completion Supervisor still retain overall responsibility particularly related to
operating efficiency and safety and shall support the Company Well Site Geologist to
ensure overall log quality.
The Logging Engineer shall immediately inform the Company Drilling and Completion
Supervisor of any obstacle or difficulty encountered while running or pulling out of the
hole.
When running the gas boomer for velocity surveys, ensure that an adequate amount of
safety slings are used to prevent disengagement of the boomer from the crane wiggle
weight.
The weak point in the logging string shall be checked and changed regularly to avoid
its premature breaking when running tools under normal hole conditions.
The Company Drilling and Completion Supervisors must be sure the Logging Engineer
has dimensional drawings of all tools run in hole, has appropriate overshot for all tools
and appropriate crossovers are available on the rig floor for a possible fishing
operation of logging tools.
Under normal circumstances, all logging equipment transported to the rig site by
helicopter, should be returned to shore by helicopter also. If logging equipment has to
be returned by sea, the Eni-Agip shore base should dispatch the proper racking
facilities and boxes to the rig. When logging equipment is shipped to the rig, there is
no objection against a return trip by sea, since the equipment is prepared for such
transport.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
160 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
13.2.2. Preparations
1)
2)
3)
4)
Reconfirm the Logging Programme with Company Office (Exploration and Reservoir
Departments) and determine the details which may have been omitted from the initial
programme, such as logging intervals, vertical scales, etc.
Notify the Logging Contractor of the required logs, specifying special logging tools to
be delivered when required. Also provide them with hole information such as high
bottom hole temperature, high pressure, tight hole, deviation records, etc.
Check that the mud samples have been collected, properly labelled and given to the
Logging Engineer for resistivity measurements.
Extreme care shall be taken in collecting mud samples as well as measuring mud
resistivity and temperature. Mud samples shall be taken from the mud outlet of the
shale shaker immediately before stopping circulation and pulling drill pipe in
preparation for logging. Mud samples obtained from the active pits are not
representative of the mud in the well and are not a suitable substitute.
13.2.3. Quality Control

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
All logging tools must be correctly calibrated before each logging run. To facilitate the
calibration, the Logging Engineer will need a mud sample (Refer to previous point
above).
All logs should be run at the correct logging speed.
Correlate the casing shoe depth and total depth by driller measurements versus
electric line measurement. Consistent differences should be resolved and explained in
the remarks of the log heading.
Check that on every long run, three thermometers are used to record the bottom hole
temperature and that they are changed after every two successive runs. Also record
the time of the end of the last circulation and the time when thermometers in the
logging tools have reached TD.
Mechanical and electrical zeros, repeat section, overlaps sections and special checks
should be printed on the final copies of the logs. Overlap sections should be run over
any anomalous reading. Field reports should be prepared during logging operations.
On second and subsequent runs, overlap the last 150ft (45m) of the log as a logger
overlap may occasionally be required for interpretation purposes. Overlap sections and
final prints of the logs should be reproduced in the field.
Request the Logging Engineer to include any information of interest in the remarks in
the log headings.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
161 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
13.2.4. Handling Explosives

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
The Company Drilling and Completion Supervisor is the person in overall charge
throughout all perforating operations.
The Logging Engineer is responsible for the storage, transport, handling, loading,
arming and firing of perforating guns.
Utmost care shall be taken during transportation, loading and back-loading of
explosives, (explosives and detonators shall always be transported and stored in
separate containers.) Local legislation may dictate storage and transporting
procedures.
The quantity of explosives stored must be kept to a minimum.
Explosives shall be kept on the rig for the minimum time required for operations and
during such time they shall be stored in a designated locked container. The handling of
the explosives must be carried out only by authorised personnel. Explosives should
never be stored in vicinity of hazardous materials, e.g. flammable or combustible
liquids, compressed gases and welding equipment.
The wellhead, derrick and logging unit must be electrically grounded together.
A precise record must be kept of all explosives received, stowed or off loaded.
Only authorised personnel shall handle explosives. When handling explosives,
everybody not directly involved in the operation shall stay away from the area, while
those involved shall stay out of the line of fire of the charges. The area should be
marked off with barrier tape.
As an electrical potential could trigger the detonators, any source of such potential
shall be switched off to avoid premature detonation. Such sources include any radio
transmitter (include crane radius) and welding equipment. The Company Drilling and
Completion Supervisor shall collect all portable radios inside the Company Office in
order to avoid any possibility of untimely use. Radio silence conditions shall be
observed while guns are being primed and while primed guns are above sea bed.
Off shore the following services shall be advised prior to radio silence being in force:
Stand-by vessel
Helicopter operations
Eni-Agip shore base
Other nearby installations.

The Logging Engineer shall check that no other spurious potentials are present
between the derrick, well-head and logging unit. In the event of uncontrollable sources
of potential such as thunderstorms, operations involving the use of explosive shall be
suspended.
The only exception to the precaution mentioned above is the SAFE (Slapper Activated
Firing Equipment) which can be operated, under any weather condition, during radio
transmissions and welding operations.
An emergency plan shall be prepared in case of fire on the rig.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
162 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
13.2.5. Handling Radioactive Sources

The radioactive sources are in the form of pellets which are permanently encased in a metal
shield (packing) even during logging. This shield decreases the energy and hence the range
of emissions.
When the source is not in use, it shall be kept in a second metal shield, which further
reduces the energy and range of the emissions.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
Offshore transportation is generally conducted by ship. When transported by ship, the

source shall be secured in a shipping container so as to avoid damage to the
packaging. The shipping container shall be properly marked with radiation warning
signs. If transportation has to be effected by helicopter, the source shall be placed as
decided by the local Civil Aviation Administration in order to make landings or take offs
possible
During transfers of shipping container from supply vessel to the rig and vice versa,
special precautions shall be taken in order to prevent the loss of the container.
Whenever the radioactive source is not in use, it shall be stored in a locked shield
container, welded to rig deck and clearly marked with standard radioactive warning
signs on all visible sides. The container shall be stored far away from the crews
quarters, regularly occupied work space or food stuff stowage. The handling of the
explosives must be carried out only by authorised personnel.
Radiation levels shall be monitored on a regular basis to ensure that the protective
shields are not defective. A log must be kept of the results of this monitoring.
Radioactive sources shall be kept on the rig only for the time strictly necessary for
logging, unless the frequency of operations makes this impractical.
A precise record must be kept of all radioactive material received, stowed or offloaded.
During transfer of a source from the container to the tool, only logging personnel shall
be present.
The hole must be covered when a logging source on the rig floor is bring transferred
between the tool and the shield. The logging engineer is responsible for this.
If a radioactive tool has been lost in the hole and all the attempts to fish have proven
unsuccessful, the tool must be insulated in the hole by an hydraulic seal and
mechanical protection. The hydraulic seal consists of a cement plug set above the
source of at least 500ft (150m) length in two separate operations and at least 50m
(150ft) over the first permeable zone. The cement could be dyed with a red or purple
color. The mechanical protection consists normally of a whipstock shoe or other
deflection device above the cement plug. This gives protection from damage due to
further attempts at drilling or deepening. During all future circulations the mud shall be
carefully checked for radioactive contamination by the Logging Engineer using a
Gamma-Ray tool immersed in the header tank of the shale shaker. However, local
regulations will dictate the appropriate method of isolating the radioactive source.
An emergency plan shall be prepared in case of fire on the rig.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
163 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
13.2.6. Logging Tool Fishing (overstripping method)

Logging tools may become stuck down the hole, for various reasons, such as:
Hole collapse or loose formation

Hole bridge
Torpedo or cable head caught in a key seat
Cable or tool differentially stuck
Tool caught in a split casing shoe.
The normal procedure to attempt to free a stuck tool is to pull tension on the wire up to just
below the breaking strain of the weak point, or as advised by the Logging Engineer.
Sometimes, pulling on the cable does not free the tool and on the contrary it may trap the
tool further.
When the wireline is still intact it is best to use a cable guide technique where the wireline
will hold the fish in a centralised position and serve as a guide for the overshot.
The following is the suggested procedure for the stripping-over (reverse cut and thread)
technique:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
A cable hanger is clamped on the cable and landed on the rotary table maintaining
tensions of 1,000lbs over the cable weight. The cable is then cut 5 to 7ft (1.5 - 2m)
above the hanger.
A spearhead rope socket is made up on the end of the cable remaining in the well. A
rope socket, sinker bar and spearhead overshot are made up on the end of the cable
hanging in the derrick.
Assemble the overshot on the rig floor and verify the connection between the
spearhead and the overshot.
Pick up and hang a stand of drill pipe over the rotary table. The spear head overshot is
drawn up to the derrick mans board and the derrick man lowers the cable with the
spear overshot down the pipe.
The spear head overshot is attached to the spear head, the cable is tensioned and the
overshot is made up to the pipe. Spot weld the overshot guide to the bowl and make
sure that at least two circulating ports are open.
A little strain is taken on the cable and the cable hanger is removed. The drill pipe is
then lowered through the rotary table and set on the slips.
The C plate is placed on top of the drill pipe tool joint in the rotary table to hold the
section of cable in the well.
The spear head overshot is released and pulled up to the derrick man so that he can
send it down the next stand of pipe. The operation is repeated until the overshot is at a
short distance from the fish.
A circulating sub is made up on the top of the drill pipe. The lower section of the cable
is landed on the circulating sub and the spear head overshot is released.
The kelly (or circulating head) is then installed and the mud is circulated to remove all
the cuttings and debris in the overshot and from the top of the fish.
Upon completion of the circulation the kelly is removed, the spear head overshot is
connected to the spear head and a tension of approximately 2,000lbs (1t) is applied.
The string is lowered and the overshot latched on to the fish. A tension increase when
lowering the string after latching on to the fish, or a decrease when pulling up, is a
good indication that the fish is engaged.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
164 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
If a T sub and stuffing box are available on the rig, the string can be lowered while
circulating. This will ensure that the overshot and the fish are clear from the cuttings
and a pressure increase is another indication that the fish is engaged.
13)
14)
Note:
The cable hanger is then clamped on the cable below the rope sockets and the hanger
is set in the elevator. The weak point is broken by pulling on the cable with the
travelling block.
The cable is pulled out of the drill pipe and the string is pulled out of the hole.
While running in the overshot with DP, a decrease in cable tension may
occur indicating that the tool has become free. In this case the tool is
pulled until it latches inside the overshot. The procedure is then the same
as stated above.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
IDENTIFICATION CODE
PAGE
165 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
14.
WELL ABANDONMENT
14.1.
TEMPORARY ABANDONMENT
14.1.1. During Drilling Operations

Any drilled well which is to be temporarily abandoned shall be cemented with Drilling Kill
Weight mud below the plug. Where there is an open hole below the deepest string of casing
a cement plug shall be placed in such manner that extends at least 50m above and below
the casing shoe.
The top of the cement plug shall be located and verified by mechanical loading.
If the condition of the formation makes cementing difficult, a bridge plug may be positioned
in the lower part of the casing, but not more than 50m above the shoe and a cement plug at
least 20m long shall be placed on top of the mechanical plug.
Then, a cement plug shall be set at least 50 - 100m in length into the casing, depending on
casing diameter, between 20 - 50m below ground level or the seabed. The top of the cement
plug shall be located and verified by mechanical loading.
14.1.2. During Production Operations
1)
Plugging programme before a production well test:

Open Hole
In the part of borehole where casing has not been installed and where permeable
zones containing liquid or gas have been found, cement plugs shall be placed in such
a way as to prevent liquid or gas from cross flowing into other zones. For each
individual zone the cement plug shall be positioned such that its upper and lower ends
are located at least 50m above and below the zone respectively.
The top of each cement plug shall be located and verified by mechanical loading.
Deepest Casing Shoe
Where there is an open hole below the deepest string of casing, a cement plug shall
be placed in such a manner that it extends at least 50m above and below the casing
shoe.
The top of the cement plug shall be located and verified by mechanical loading.
If the condition of the formation makes cementing difficult, a mechanical plug may be
positioned in the lower part of the casing, but not more than 50m above the shoe and a
cement plug at least 20m long shall be placed on top of the mechanical plug.
These plugs shall be verified by mechanical loading or pressure tested for sufficient
time and with enough differential pressure to detect a possible leak.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
166 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
2)
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Plugging programme after a production test:

Uninteresting perforated zones
These intervals shall be isolated by means of a mechanical plug and shall be squeeze
cemented. If the condition of the formation makes cementing difficult a cement plug
50m high will be set on top of the mechanical plug.
If this is not possible, a cement plug shall be placed in such a way that the upper and
lower ends of the plug are located at least 50m above and below the perforated zone
respectively, or down to the nearest plug if the distance is less than 50m. All the plugs
shall be described, as seen in the previous subsection.
Interesting perforated zones
These intervals shall be isolated by means of a mechanical plug.
Then, a cement plug shall be set at least 50 - 100m in length into the casing,
depending on casing diameter, between 5 - 50m below the sea bottom. The top of the
cement plug shall be located and verified by mechanical loading.
14.2.
PERMANENT ABANDONMENT
14.2.1. Plugging
A well has to be plugged so as to effectively seal-off all potential hydrocarbon bearing zones
from fresh water bearing formations and to protect any zones which may contain other
minerals.
14.2.2. Plugging Programme
Open Hole
All permeable zones in an open hole shall be plugged so that formation fluid is prevented
from flowing from one zone to another.
Plug(s) shall be set so that the top and the bottom is at least 50m above and below the
zone(s). Each plug has to be tested as per the procedure in section 12.5.
Deepest Casing Shoe
At the top of the open hole a cement plug shall be set so that the upper and lower ends of
the plug are located at least 50m above and below the casing shoe. The plug shall be tested
by mechanical loading.
Perforated Casing Zones
Each zone tested through casing perforations shall be squeeze-cemented as soon as the
test is finished, if the well is to be abandoned. A cement retainer will be set 10-15m above
the perforated zone (avoid setting it on a casing collar) and an injection test shall be
performed using fresh water and recording the pressure/flow rate ratios.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
167 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
The cement slurry volume will be calculated in order to have the cement from bottom
perforation to the cement retainer and a minimum of 100ltrs slurry per metre of perforated
zone into the formation. At the end of the squeeze, a 50m cement plug shall be set above
the cement retainer. The length of this plug may be reduced to avoid any interference with
upper intervals to be tested or produced.
Liner Top
At the hanging point of the liner, a cement plug shall be set so that the top and bottom of the
plug is at least 50m above and below the hanging point. The plug has to be tested as section
12.5.
Intermediate Casing Shoe
In case any of the intermediate casings is not cemented up to at least 100m inside the
previous casing shoe, the casing shall be cut at least 100m above the shoe of the previous
casing string, the casing recovered, and a cement plug shall be placed so that it extends at
least 50 - 100m above and below the casing cut point.
Surface plug
A surface plug (at least 150m long) shall be set so that the top of the plug be 50m or less
below ground level or seabed.
After setting the surface plug, each surface casing and conductor pipe shall be cut at least
5m below sea bed, using mechanical cutters.
14.2.3. Plugging procedure
1)
2)
Cement plugs, set when abandoning wells, should be formed from neat slurries
whenever possible. If static bottom hole temperature exceeds 110C use special non
degradable cements (i.e. Geotherm).
Spacers should be pumped ahead and behind slurry.
Special consideration should be given to the composition and volume of the spacers
when the mud is oil based, calcium chloride or lignosulphonate treated.
The hydrostatic head reduction due to the spacer volume and density should be
calculated. The spacers should have a volume corresponding to a length of at least
328ft (100m).
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
The slurry volume should be calculated using a calliper log, if available. When a
calliper log is not available, use a slurry volume excess based on local experience.
Plugs exceeding 200m in length should not be set in one stage.
If the hole is badly washed out or when potential losses are expected, it is preferable to
set two short plugs instead of one long one.
All cement plugs shall be set using a tubing stinger.
Displacement should be calculated in order to spot a balanced cement plug
(hydrostatic heads inside the string and outside in the annulus shall be the same).
An under displacement of 1 or 2bbl is suggested to help draining the slurry off the pipe
when pulling out of hole.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
9)
10)
11)
12)
14.3.
168 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
8)
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
As soon as the plug is set, pull out slowly 30 - 50m above the theoretical top of the
plug and direct circulate (reverse circulation can also be considered if conditions allow
it).
Monitor and record spacer and slurry returns.
Never stab the stinger back into the plug this is to avoid plugging of the stinger.
The position and efficiency of all cement plugs shall be verified by locating the top of
the plug and by applying bit weight on the plug after cement setting, usually 20,00040,000lbs, but dependent on hole size) .
Records shall be kept of all plugs set and the results of tests shall be available for
inspection.
CASING CUTTING/RETRIEVING
Consideration can be given, if deemed economically profitable, to cut and retrieve sections
5
of uncemented 7" and 9 /8" casing.
Mechanical cutters are used for this operation.
After cutting the casing, a complete circulation shall be made to reduce friction and balance
the mud.
If the casing is cut and recovered leaving a stub, one of the following methods shall be used
to plug the casing stub:
14.3.1. Stub Termination (Inside A Casing String)

A stub inside a casing string shall be plugged by one of the following methods:
A cement plug is set so as to extend 50m above and 50 below the stub,
A permanent bridge plug set 10-15m above the stub and capped with at least
20m of cement.
14.3.2. Stub Termination (Below A Casing String)

If the stub is below the next larger string, plugging shall be accomplished in accordance with
section 14.2.2 (Open Hole).
The plug shall be mechanically tested.
After setting a surface plug, each surface casing and conductor pipe shall be cut at least 5m
below sea bed using mechanical cutters.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
IDENTIFICATION CODE
PAGE
169 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
15.
SURFACE WELLHEAD
All the following information relates to the most common type of wellhead used by Eni-Agip
in drilling activities (Refer to table 15.a through table 15.b).
15.1.1. PRELIMINARY CHECKS
15.2.
1)
2)
Preliminary checks should be carried out when equipment is delivered to rig site.
Identify all equipment by the part numbers stamped on each item.
Check that the bolts are of the same length, diameter and part number as stated in the
specification.
3)
Clean each part thoroughly, paying particular attention to:
Ring joints
Ring joint grooves
Packing seal seats
Slips and slip seats
Packing
Threads of the lateral outlets (base flange).
4)
5)
Check the correct fitting of the slips and the support rings in the seats.
Rubber parts shall be carefully identified and inspected upon arrival or upon removal
from storage. Particular attention must be paid to looking for surface cracks and/or
discoloration.
BASE FLANGE INSTALLATION
15.2.1. Welding Procedure

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
Cut the 30 CP at cellar deck level (Jack-up) or at cellar bottom (land rig).
Cut the 20 casing at about 50cm above the cellar deck or cellar bottom
Empty the casing of mud bringing the fluid level down to 50 cm below the cellar deck
or cellar bottom.
Pre-heat the casing in the proximity of the final cut line up to the same temperature
required for welding.
Cut the casing at about 200-400mm from cellar deck or cellar bottom according to the
o
Drilling Programme, with a 30-35 internal bevel, using a guide frame to ensure the cut
is horizontal.
Thoroughly clean the surfaces to be welded and ensure they are free from paint,
grease, rust or dirt.
Install the base flange, checking it is horizontal and that the lateral outlets are aligned
according to Company Drilling and Completion Supervisor s requirements.
During welding operations ensure that all parts are protected against rain, wind, oil,
mud or water.
Heat the outside of the base flange and the inside of the casing with an oxyacetylene
torch until the surface reach the required pre-heated temperature. For carbon steels,
refer to Table, for chromium molybdenum steels refer to table 15.b.
During this operation care shall be given to ensure the uniform expansion of the parts
to be welded, as there may be significant differences in their wall thickness.
Perform internal welding first. Start welding two sections of 5-10cm length diametrically
ARPO
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
170 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
0
0.
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
opposite. Continue and repeat this step at 90 Continue and repeat for subsequent
sections until the first weld bead is completed.
Subsequent passes should be performed continuously to complete the fill up the joint.
Care should be given to avoid overlapping or causing any discontinuity of the weld
bead during the same pass.
The external weld should be performed using the same procedure.
Once started, welding should be finished without interruption. Slow cooling should be
carried out by using appropriate insulating systems.
Pressure test the welding after complete cooling of the base flange.
Check the base flange horizontal alignment and the inside alignment of the welded
area.
Seal the CP-casing annulus with two semicircular steel plates, leaving a test port for
pressure checking.
% Carbon
Thickness (mm)
8
12
25
40 and more
0.2 C
20C
50C
100C
150C
0.3 C
50C
70C
150C
200C
0.4 C
100C
200C
250C
300C
0.5 C
200C
300C
300C
300C
0.6 C
300C
350C
350C
350C
0.7 C
300C
400C
400C
400C
Table 15.A - Required Pre-Heating Temperature Carbon Steels

Chemical Analysis
Preheating
% Cr
% Mo
Temperature
0.5
0.5
100 - 150C
1.0
0.5
100 - 150C
2.0
0.5
150 - 200 C
2.25
1.0
200 - 280C
5.0
0.5
200 - 280C
Table 15.B - Required Pre-Heating Temperature Chromium/Molybdenum Steel
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
171 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
15.2.2. Safety
a)
During the time of operation to prepare and carry out the welding of the base flange, it
is absolutely forbidden to work on the drilling floor or in proximity of the wellhead.
b)
Make sure that the welder has efficient ground and safety switches conforming to CEI
standards or other international/local regulations.
c)
The welder and his assistant must wear protective clothing.
d)
The welder must never be left by himself.
e)
The work area must be protected from any falling objects. For this reason a protective
system with scaffolding must be built in order to guarantee safety during the base
flange welding operations.
15.2.3. Pressure Testing

a)
A pressure test must be carried out using hydraulic oil after cooling of the base flange.
Do not exceed 70% of API casing collapse pressure rating although the pressure
values should be stated in the Drilling Programme.
b)
During this test, no sweating should occur. Upon completion of the test, install a
wellhead protection cap to prevent objects accidentally falling into the wellbore.
c)
Re-install the /4 NPT plug in the test port.

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
All slips, packing elements and ring joints and their seats should be thoroughly cleaned
and lubricated.
Make sure the hinged slips and spring retaining rings are unlatched.
Pick-up the BOP
Be sure that the correct tension is applied to the casing string.
Clean and inspect the ID of the base flange, polishing out any burrs or scratchers.
Place two wooden boards of equal thickness across the base flange so that they
straddle the casing.
Wrap the casing slips around the casing. Latch the hinged slips and spring retaining
ring.
Lower the slips into the base flange bowl until they shoulder on the casing-spool,
checking the correct alignment of the slip segments and the correct position.
Slowly release the casing tension permitting the slips to set. Slippage between slips
and casing must be prevented.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
172 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Cut a drain hole in the casing approximately 12 (30cm) from the top of the base
flange.
Allow the casing to drain and cut it off at 12 (30cm) above the base flange.
Remove the casing reminant and prepare for the final cut.
Remove the fluid inside the casing to below the top of the base flange using a cup or a
bucket.
1
Cut the casing again at 4 (101.6mm) to 4 /4 (108mm) from the top of the base flange.
Make sure the cut surface is level.

1)
2)
3)
4)
Remove any burrs from the cut edges of the casing.

Install the first primary support. Place the primary support over the casing with the
bevelled side up. Lower the packing support until it shoulders on the body counterbore.
Install the primary packing by:
a)
Clean and oil the casing and packing thoroughly.
b)
Fit one side of the packing lip over the casing.
c)
Insert a clean welding rod (with the flux removed) or screw driver between the ID
of the base flange and the OD of the packing. This will facilitate installation of the
primary packing.
Tap around the packing with a hammer until the packing is completely installed on the
casing.
Caution:
5)
Note:
6)
Note:
7)
Make sure that the packing is not cut or gouged during the installation.
Continue to tap the packing down until it is flush with the body flange and the outer lips
have fully entered the bevel of the counterbore. Drive the packing down until it contacts
the first primary support.
If the body outlet valve is open, entrapped gas will not hinder seating of
packing.
Install the second primary support by placing the upper packing support, with the lip
receiving face down, over the casing and dropping it into place.
When properly installed, the back face of the second primary support
shall not protrude past the base flange face.
Install the first secondary support by placing the secondary support over the casing
with bevelled side up. Lower the support until it rests on top of primary packing group.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
173 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
8)
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Install the secondary packing by:

a)
Thoroughly grease the packing and fit one side of the packing lip over the
casing.
b)
Install the packing with a hammer as in step (4).
c)
Drive the packing down until it contacts the first secondary support.
d)
Install the second secondary support by: placing the secondary support over the
casing with bevel facing down. Lower support until it contacts the secondary
packing.
15.2.7. Casing Spool Installation

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Clean the ring grooves on the bottom flange of casing spool and on the base flange,
as well as the restricted packing bore of the casing spool.
Oil the secondary packing and the restricted packing bore of the casing spool.
Fill the void area with oil around the primary and secondary packing group.
Place the metal ring joint in its groove.
Align the bolt holes on the casing spool with the bolt holes on the base flange.
Lower the casing spool over the secondary packing assembly (being careful not to roll
or tear the secondary packing), until the casing spool comes to rest on the ring gasket.
The use of a torque wrench is recommended.
Assemble nuts to bolts and tighten. Wherever possible use a hydraulic studs
tensioning system. This system allows tightening of all studs together at once with a
reduced make-up time.
Otherwise tighten them conventionally with the correct torque (Refer to 15.3) to ensure
a proper seal, tighten the bolts using the following method:
8)
Tighten the first bolt.
9)
Tighten the bolt at 180 from the 1st bolt.
10) Tighten the bolt 90 from the 1st bolt.
11) Tighten the bolt 180 from the 3rd bolt.
12) Continue this alternating procedure until all bolts have been tightened.
Checking the torque of the stud bolts must be done during drilling and after each BOP test
due to the vibration and weight that they have to bear.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
174 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
15.3.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
RECOMMENDED FLANGE BOLT TORQUE

(API Specification 6A seventeenth edition 1996)
It should be recognised that applied torque to a nut is only one of several ways to
approximate the tension and stress in a fastener.
The following table 15.c is for the convenience of the user only, and is based on calculations
which assume certain friction coefficients for the friction between the studs and nuts, and
between the nuts and the flange face.
Two coefficients of friction are used in the table:
0.13 approximates the friction with threads and nut bearing surface being bare
metal well lubricated with API Bull 5A2 thread compound.
0.07 approximates threads and nut face coated with fluoropolymer material.
The table shows material properties equivalent to A193 grades B7 and B7M which are the
most commonly used.
Values of torque for materials having other strength levels may be obtained by multiplying
the tabulated torque value by the ratio of the new material's yield strength to the tabulated
material's yield strength.
The following equations are used to calculate the values in table 15.d
AS =
[D (0.9743P)]2
4
F = A s
T=
FE(P + fES )
H+D +K
+ Ff
2(E PfS )
4
where:
As
D
E
F
f
H
K
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
S
T
=
=
=
Stress area, ins or mm

Thread major diameter, ins or mm
Pitch diameter of thread, ins or mm
Force per stud, lbf or Newtons
Friction coefficient
Nut hex size = 1.5 D + 0.125ins (3.175mm)
Nut internal chamfer = 0.125ins (3.175 mm)
1
Thread pitch =
ins or mm
Number of threadsper unitlength
Secant of 30 = 1.1547
Torque, in/lbf
2
Stress in stud, lb/in
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
175 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Torque obtained for calculations and can be divided by 12 to obtain ft/lbf.

The stresses in these calculations are based on stress area and not thread root area.
The following flanges should not be made up beyond 40,000 psi (275 MPa) bolt stress due
to potentially high flange stress:
Flange
Bolt Stress
2,000 psi (13.8 MPa)
2,000 psi (13.8 MPa)
2,000 psi (13.8 MPa)
3,000 psi (20.7 MPa)
13 /8
16 /4
21 /4
13 /8
Table 15.C - Flange Bolt Stress
ARPO
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
176 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Stud with Sy = 80 Ksi

Bolt stress = 40 Ksi
Bolt stress = 52.5 Ksi
Stud
Diameter
D
Thread
per in
Tension
Torque
Torque
Tension
Torque
Torque
f = 0.07
(in.)
(lbf)
(ft-lbf)
f = 0.13
f = 0.07
(ft-lbf)
(lbf)
(ft-lbf)
(l/in.)
0.500
13
5676
27
45
7450
35
59
0.625
11
9040
52
88
11865
68
115
0.750
10
13378
90
153
17559
118
200
0.875
18469
143
243
24241
188
319
1.000
24230
213
361
31802
279
474
1.125
31618
305
523
41499
401
686
1.250
39988
421
726
52484
553
953
1.375
49340
563
976
64579
739
1281
1.500
59674
733
1278
78322
962
1677
1.625
70989
934
1635
93173
1226
2146
1.750
83286
1169
2054
109313
1534
2696
1.875
96565
1440
2539
126741
1890
3332
2.000
110825
1750
3094
145458
2297
4061
2.250
142292
2496
4436
186758
3276
5822
2.500
177685
3429
6118
233212
4500
8030
2.625
Bolt stress = 47.5 Ksi

Tension
Torque
Torque
f = 0.13
f = 0.07
f = 0.13
(ft-lbf)
(lbf)
(ft-lbf)
(ft-lbf)
233.765
4716
8430
2.750
257694
5424
9712
3.000
309050
7047
12654
3.250
365070
8965
16136
3.750
491099
13782
24905
3.875
525521
15208
27506
4.000
561108
16730
30282
Table 15.D - Recommended Bolt Torque for API Flanges in ft/lbf for
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
177 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
All slips, packing elements and ring joints and their seats should be thoroughly cleaned
and lubricated.
Make sure the hinged slips and spring retaining rings are unlatched.
Pick-up the BOP.
Be sure that the correct tension in the casing string is applied.
Clean and inspect the ID of the casing spool, polish out any burrs or scratcher.
Place two wooden boards of equal thickness across the casing spool so that they
straddle the casing.
Wrap the casing slips around the casing. Latch the hinged slips and spring retaining
ring.
Lower the slips into the casing spool bowl until they shoulder in the casing head
checking the alignment of the slip segments for correct positioning.
The casing tension shall be slowly released, permitting the slips to set. Slippage
between slips and casing should not be allowed.

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Cut a drain hole in the casing approximately 12 (30cm) from the top of the casing
spool.
Allow the casing to drain and cut it off at 12 (30cm) above the spool flange.
Remove the casing remnant and prepare for the final cut.
Remove the fluid inside of the casing to below the top of the casing spool using a cup
or a bucket.
1
Cut the casing again at 5 (127mm) to 5 /2 (140mm) from the top of the casing spool.
Make sure the cut surface is level.

1)
2)
3)
4)
Remove any burrs from the cut edges of the casing.

Install the first primary support by placing the primary support over the casing with
bevelled side up. Lower the packing support until it shoulders in the body counterbore.
Install the primary packing by:
a)
Thoroughly clean and oil the casing and packing.
b)
Fit one side of the packing lip over the casing.
c)
Insert a clean welding rod (with the flux removed) or a screw driver between the
ID of the casing spool and the OD of the packing. This will facilitate installation of
the primary packing.
Tap around the packing with a hammer until the packing is completely installed on the
casing.
Caution:
Make sure that the packing is not cut or gouged during the installation.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
If the body outlet valve is open, entrapped gas will not hinder seating of
packing.
Install the second primary support by (refer to Section 15.2.6).
Placing the upper packing support, with the lip receiving face down, over the casing
and dropping it into place.
Note:
8)
9)
10)
11)
Continue to tap the packing down until it is flush with the body and after the outer lips
have fully entered the bevel of the counterbore. Drive the packing down until it contacts
the first primary support.
Note:
6)
7)
178 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
5)
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
When properly installed, the back face of the second primary support
shall not protrude past the casing spool face.
Install the first secondary support by placing the secondary support over the casing
with bevelled side up. Lower support until it rests on top of the primary packing group.
Install the secondary packing by:
a)
Thoroughly oil the packing and start one side of the packing lip over the casing.
b)
Install packing with hammer as in step (d).
c)
Drive the packing down until it contacts the first secondary support.
Install the second secondary support by(Refer to Section 15.2.6).

Placing the secondary support over the casing with bevel facing down. Lower the
support until it contacts the secondary packing.
15.3.4. Tubing Spool Installation

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
Clean the ring grooves on the bottom flange of tubing spool and on the casing spool,
as well as the restricted packing bore of the tubing spool.
Oil the secondary packing and the restricted packing bore of the tubing spool.
Fill the void area with oil around the primary and secondary packing group.
Install the metal ring gasket in the ring groove on the casing spool.
Install the bolts in the bottom flange of the tubing spool.
Align the bolt holes on the tubing spool with the bolt holes on the casing spool.
Lower the tubing spool over the secondary packing assembly (being careful not to roll
or tear the secondary packing), until the tubing spool comes to rest on the ring gasket.
Assemble nuts to bolts and tighten. wherever possible use a hydraulic studs
tensioning system. This system allows tightening of all studs at once together with a
reduced make-up time.
Otherwise the flange stud bolts must be tightened conventionally with the correct
torque (Refer to 15.3).To ensure a proper seal, tighten the bolts using the following
method:
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
179 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
a)
Tighten the first bolt.
b)
Tighten the bolt 180 from the 1 bolt.
c)
d)
e)
Continue this alternating procedure until all bolts have been tightened.
st
st
rd
15.3.5. Primary And Secondary Packing Group Test

To properly test the primary and secondary packing groups it is necessary to have the
following components and fittings:
High pressure hydraulic test pump assembly complete with hose.

1
/2 needle valve, /2 NPT Pin.
1
Tee, /2 NPT XX Heavy Box x Box.
3
1
Bushing, /4 x /2 NPT Pin x Box
1
Reducing bushing attached to the pump hose end, /2 NPT Pin x Pin.
1
Nipple, /2 NPT XX Heavy x 10 long;
Pressure relief needle valve.
After completion of the casing spool and packing assembly, proceed to testing the packing
groups with hydraulic oil as follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Remove the /4 NPT plug from the test port and screw on the /4 x /2 NPT bushing.
Leave the check valve on seat.
Install the test equipment.
The test pressure is given in the Drilling Programme. Take care not to exceed 70% of
the casing collapse rating.
All test pressures should be kept on for at least 15 mins.
During the seal test the annulus space valve of the previous casing must be kept open
with the 2 LP plug disassembled, as a leak in the primary packing group could put the
annulus space under pressure.
Upon completion of the test, bleed off all pressure and unscrew the relief needle valve
so as to avoid it breaking during the BOP stack movement.
Test the BOP with a cup tester. The needle valve must be replaced in its relative test
port with the needle completely open.
The annulus space valve of the previous casing must be also kept open.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
180 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
20"
13 3/8"
9 5/8"
7"
WP (psi)
Section 1
Section 2
Section 3
Section 4
Section 5
3K (A)
470
620
472
-
3K (B)
470
620
472
-
5K (C)
470
625
472
-
5K (D)
470
690
670
581
-
10K (E)
470
690
660
700
-
10K (F)
510
850
700
700
--
Figure 15.A - Wellhead Dimensions (mm)
15K (G)
510
850
700
750
15K (H)
510
850
700
750
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
181 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
BREDA
13"5/8 x 3K; 13 5/8" x 3K; 7"1/16 x 3K

P/N BREDA
Q.tY
BIT PILOT 7".
42580-003
SECONDARY RINGS 7"
42573-066
SECONDARY PACKING 7"
42572-027
TUBING SPOOL 7 1/16" x 3K
60739-001
STUDS 1 3/8"*260 mm
39925-007
20
RING JOINT RX-57
49623-020
PRIMARY PACKING 7"
42572-009
PRIMARY RINGSI 7"
42573-017
SLIPS 7"
59215-066
DESCRPTION
CASING SPOOL FLANGE
VALVE 3000 Fl. 2 1/16" x 3K
NIPPLE. 2 1/16" API 1/2"NPT
COMPANION FLANGE . 2"1/16 Thr. 2 1/6" API
BULL PLUG 2"1/16 API
RING JOINT R-24
STUDS 7/8" x 8"
16
CASING SPOOL FLANGE
Csg 13 3/8"
Csg 9 5/8"
Csg 7"
BIT PILOT 9 5/8" x 8 1/2"
42580-010
SECONDARY RINGS 9 5/8"
42573-041
SECONDARY PACKING 9 5/8"
42572-022
CASING SPOOL 13 5/8" x 3K
59203-001
STUDS 1 3/8"* x 260 mm
39925-007
20
RING JOINT RX- 57
49623-020
PRIMARY PACKING 9 5/8"
42572-023
PRIMARY RINGS 9 5/8"
42573-044
SLIPS 9 5/8"
59215-069
VALVE 3000 Fl.2 1/16" 5000
NIPPLE FIL. 2 1/16" x 1/2" NPT
COMPANION FLANGE 2"1/16 Trh. 2"1/16 API
BULL PLUG 2"1/16
RING JOINT R-24
STUDS 7/8" x 8"
16
BRADEN HEAD FLANGE

BRADEN HEAD 13 5/8" x 3000 psi
59215-001
VALVE 3000 Fl.2 1/16" x 5000
NIPPLE 2 1/16" API x 1/2" NPT
NIPPLE FIL. 2 1/16" API
COMPANION FLANGE. 2"1/16 Trh. Fil. 2"1/16 API
BULL PLUG 2"1/16
RING JOINT R-24
STUDS 7/8" x 6"
16
Figure 15.B - Breda Wellhead Type A
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
182 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
BREDA
13"5/8 x 3K; 13 5/8" x 3K; 9" x 3K

DESCRPTION
P/N BREDA
Q.tY
BIT PILOT 7".
42580-005
SECONDARY RINGS 7"
42573-081
42572-042
TUBING SPOOL 13 5/8 - 9"" x 3K
60649-001
STUDS 1 3/8" x 260 mm
39925-007
20
RING JOINT RX-57
49623-020
PRIMARY PACKING 7"
42572-009
PRIMARY RINGSI 7"
42573-017
SLIPS 7"
59215-066
CASING SPOOL FLANGE
VALVE 3000 Fl. 2 1/16" x 3K
NIPPLE. 2 1/16" API 1/2" NPT
RING JOINT R-24
STUDS 7/8" x 6"
16
CASING SPOOL FLANGE
Csg 13 3/8"
Csg 9 5/8"
Csg 7"
BIT PILOT 9 5/8" x 8 1/2"
42580-010
42573-041
42572-022
59203-001
STUDS 1 3/8"* x 260 mm
39925-007
20
RING JOINT RX- 57
49623-020
42572-023
42573-044
SLIPS 9 5/8"
59215-069
VALVE 3000 Fl.2 1/16" 5000
BULL PLUG 2"1/16
RING JOINT R-24
STUDS 7/8" x 8"
16
BRADEN HEAD FLANGE

59179-001
VALVE 3000 Fl.2 1/16" x 5000
BULL PLUG 2"1/16
RING JOINT R-24
STUDS 7/8" x 6"
16
Figure 15.C - Breda Wellhead Type B
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
183 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
BREDA
13"5/8 x 3K; 11" x 5K; 7 1/16" x 5K

DESCRPTION
P/N BREDA
Q.tY
BIT PILOT 7".
42580-003
SECONDARY RINGS 7"
42573-066
42572-027
TUBING SPOOL 11" x 5K 7 1/16" x 5K
60410-001
STUDS 1 7/8" x 350 mm
39925-017
12
RING JOINT RX-54
49623-019
PRIMARY PACKING 7"
42572-021
PRIMARY RINGSI 7"
42573-062
SLIPS 7"
59215-046
CASING SPOOL FLANGE
VALVE 3000 Fl. 2 1/16" x 3K
NIPPLE. 2 1/16" API 1/2"NPT
RING JOINT R-24
STUDS 7/8" x 6"
16
CASING SPOOL FLANGE
Csg 13 3/8"
Csg 9 5/8"
Csg 7"
BIT PILOT 9 5/8" x 8 1/2"
42580-010
42573-041
42572-022
CASING SPOOL 13 5/8" x 3K; 11" x 5K
59714-001
STUDS 1 3/8"* x 260 mm
39925-007
20
RING JOINT RX- 57
49623-020
42572-023
42573-044
SLIPS 9 5/8"
59215-069
VALVE 3000 Fl.2 1/16" 5000
BULL PLUG 2"1/16
RING JOINT R-24
SPUDS 7/8" x 6"
16
BRADEN HEAD FLANGE

59179-001
VALVE 3000 Fl.2 1/16" x 5000
BULL PLUG 2"1/16
RING JOINT R-24
STUDS 7/8" x 6"
16
Figure 15.D - Breda Wellhead Type C
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
184 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
BREDA
20"3/4 x 3K; 13"5/8 x 5K; 11" x 5K; 7"1/16 x 5K

Description
P/N
Q.tY
CASING SPOOL FLANGE

BIT PILOT 7" x 5 3/4"
42580-003
SECONDARY RINGS 7"
42573-066
42572-027
CASING SPOOL 11" x 5K - 7 1/16" x 5K
60410-001
STUDS 1 7/8" x 350 mm
39925-017
12
RING JOINT RX-54
42623-019
PRIMARY PACKING 7"
42572-021
PRIMARY RINGS 7"
42573-062
SLIPS 7"
59215-046
BIT PILOT 9 5/8" x 8 1/2"
42580-010
47844-050
42572-051
CASING SPOOL 13 5/8" x 5K - 11" x 5K
61496-001
STUDS 1 5/8" x 320 mm
47641-004
16
RING JOINT BX-160
42555-060
42572-023
42573-044
SLIPS 9 5/8"
59215-069
CASING SPOLL FLANGE
CASING SPOOL FLANGE

1
BIT PILOT
42573-059
SECONDARY PACKING 13/8"
42572-026
CASING SPOOL 20 3/4" x 3K - 13 5/8" x 5K
60965-001
STUDS 2" x 370 mm
47641-018
20
RING JOINT RX-74
49623-027
42572-025
42573-060
SLIPS 13 3/8"
59215-113
60496-001
BRADEN HEAD FLANGE

BRADEN HEAD 20" 3/4 x 3000
ACCESSORIES
Description
Csg 20"
Csg 13 3/8"
Csg 9 5/8"
Q.ty
VALVE 3000 Fl. 2 1/16" x 5000
COMPANION FLANGE 2"1/16 x 5K Thr . 2"1/16 API
RING JOINT R-24
14
NIPPLE FIL. 2 1/16" APII
VALVE 5000 Fl. 2 1/16" x 5000
BULL PLUG 2"1/16 "
STUDS 7/8" x 6"
64
Csg 7"
Figure 15.E - Breda Wellhead Type D
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
185 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
BREDA
20"3/4 x 3K; 13"5/8 x 5K; 11" x 10K; 7"1/16 x 10K

Description
P/N
Q.tY
CASING SPOOL FLANGE

42580-003
SECONDARY RINGS 7"
42573-066
42572-027
60655-001
STUDS 1 3/4"*380 mm
47641-005
16
RING JOINT BX-158
42555-058
PRIMARY PACKING 7"
42572-021
PRIMARY RINGS 7"
42573-062
SLIPS 7"
59215-046
BIT PILOT 9 5/8" x 8 1/2"
42580-010
47844-050
42572-051
58501-001
STUDS 1 5/8" x 320 mm
47641-004
16
RING JOINT BX-160
42555-060
42572-023
42573-044
SLIPS 9 5/8"
59215-069
CASING SPOLL FLANGE
CASING SPOOL FLANGE

1
BIT PILOT
42573-059
42572-026
60965-001
STUDS 2" x 370 mm
47641-018
20
RING JOINT RX-74
49623-027
42572-025
42573-060
SLIPS 13 3/8"
59215-113
60496-001
BRADEN HEAD FLANGE

ACCESSORIES
Description
Csg 20"
Csg 13 3/8"
Csg 9 5/8"
Csg 7"
Q.ty
VALVE 3000 Fl. 2 1/16" x 5000
RING JOINT R-24
VALVE 10000 Fl. 2 1/16" x 10000
BULL PLUG 2"1/16 "
STUDS 7/8" x 6"
32
2
VALVE 5000 FL 2 1/16" x 5000

NIPPLE FIL. 2 3/8" EU x 1/2"NPT
BULL PLUGS 2 3/8" EU
COMPANION FLANGE 2 1/16" x 10K Thr 2 3/8" EU
RING JOINT BX - 152
STUDS 3/4" x 5 1/4"
32
Figure 15.F - Breda Wellhead Type E
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
186 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
BREDA
21"1/4 x 5K; 13"5/8 x 10K; 11" x 10K; 7"1/16 x 10K

Description
P/N
Q.tY
CASING SPOOL FLANGE

42580-003
SECONDARY RINGS 7"
42573-066
42572-027
60655-001
STUDS 1 3/4"*380 mm
47641-005
16
RING JOINT BX-158
42555-058
PRIMARY PACKING 7"
42572-021
PRIMARY RINGS 7"
42573-062
SLIPS 7"
59215-046
BIT PILOT 9 5/8" x 8 1/2"
42580-010
47844-050
42572-051
61505-001
STUDS 1 7/8" x 440 mm
47641-071
20
RING JOINT BX-159
42555-059
42572-023
42573-044
SLIPS 9 5/8"
59215-069
42573-059
42572-026
61117-001
STUDS 2" x 480 mm
47641-061
24
RING JOINT BX-165
42555-065
42572-025
42573-060
SLIPS 13 3/8"
59215-113
55990-001
CASING SPOLL FLANGE
CASING SPOOL FLANGE

BIT PILOT
BRADEN HEAD FLANGE

BRADEN HEAD 21"1/4 x 5000
ACCESSORIES
Description
Csg 20"
Csg 13 3/8"
Csg 9 5/8"
Csg 7"
Q.ty
VALVE 5000 Fl. 2 1/16" x 5000
RING JOINT R-24
VALVE 10000 Fl. 2 1/16" x 10000
BULL PLUG 2"1/16 "
STUDS 7/8" x 6"
16
RING JOINT BX - 152
12
STUDS 3/4" x 5 1/4"
48
Figure 15.G - Breda Wellhead Type F
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
187 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
BREDA
21"1/4 x 5K; 13"5/8 x 10K; 11" x 10K; 7"1/16 x 15K

Description
P/N
Q.tY
CASING SPOOL FLANGE

42580-003
SECONDARY RINGS 7"
to be defined
to be defined
59893-001
STUDS 1 3/4"*380 mm
47641-005
16
RING JOINT BX-158
42555-058
PRIMARY PACKING 7"
42572-021
PRIMARY RINGS 7"
42573-062
SLIPS 7"
59215-046
BIT PILOT 9 5/8" x 8 1/2"
42580-010
47844-050
42572-051
64505-001
STUDS 1 7/8" x 440 mm
47641-004
16
RING JOINT BX-159
42555-059
42572-023
42573-044
SLIPS 9 5/8"
59215-069
CASING SPOLL FLANGE
CASING SPOOL FLANGE

1
BIT PILOT
42573-059
42572-026
61117-001
STUDS 2" x 480 mm
47641-061
20
RING JOINT BX-165
49623-027
42572-025
42573-060
SLIPS 13 3/8"
59215-113
55990-001
BRADEN HEAD FLANGE

ACCESSORIES
Description
Csg 20"
Csg 13 3/8"
Csg 9 5/8"
Csg 7"
Q.ty
VALVE 5000 Fl. 2 1/16" x 5000
RING JOINT R-24
NIPPLE 2 1/16" API
VALVE 10000 Fl. 2 1/16" x 10000
BULL PLUG 2"1/16 "
STUDS 7/8" x 6"
32
2

RING JOINT BX - 152
12
STUDS 3/4" x 5 1/4"
32
COMPANION FLANGE 2 1/16" x 15K WITH CONNECTION

BLIND COMPANION FLANGE 2 1/16" x 15K
1
1
VALVE 15000 FL 2 1/16" x 15000
Figure 15.H - Breda Wellhead Type G
ARPO
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
188 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
BREDA
26 3/4" x 3K - 21 1/4" x 5K - 13 5/8" x 10K - 11" x 10K - 7 1/16" x 15K

Description
TUBING SPOOL FLANGE

7 1/16" 15000
42580-003
SECONDARY RINGS 7"
SECONDARY PAKING 7"
1
1
TUBING SPOOL 7 1/16" x 15K

STUDS 1 3/4"*380 mm
47641-005
16
RING JOINT BX-158
42555-058
1
1
BX-158
PRIMARY PACKING 7"
11" 10000
PRIMARY RINGS 7"
42573-062
SLIPS 7"
49215-046
BIT PILOT 9 5/8" x 8 1/2"
42580-010
47844-050
42572-051
CASING SPOOL 11" x 10K
61505-001
STUDS 1 7/8"*440 mm
47641-071
20
RING JOINT BX-159
42555-059
42572-023
42573-044
SLIPS 9 5/8"
59215-069
CASING SPOOL FLANGE
BX-159
13 5/8" 10000
BX-165
CASING SPOOL FLANGE
21 1/4" 5000
BIT PILOT 13 1/2" x 12 1/4"
2
1
BX-186
61117-001
STUDS 2" x 480 mm
47641-061
24
RING JOINT BX-165
42555-065
SLIPS 13 1/2"
26 3/4" 3000
CASING SPOOL FLANGE

1
BIT PILOT
63526-030
63526-010
63551-001
Csg 24 1/2"
Csg 18 5/8"
Csg 13 1/2"
Csg 9 5/8"
Csg 7")
1
24
STUDS 2" x 452 mm
RING JOINT BX-186

63526-001
63526-020
SLIPS 18 5/8"
63537-003
63519-001
BRADEN HEAD
BRADEN HEAD 26"3/4 x 3K
Figure 15.I - Breda Wellhead Type H
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
189 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
15.4.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
COMPACT WELLHEAD
Modern offshore drilling has uncovered a need for specially designed wellheads requiring
less space with shorter installation times, thus offering a greater degree of safety. The
solution to this need was met by the introduction of the unitised or compact wellhead which
incorporates a casing flange, casing spools and possibly a tubing spool in a single offshore
composite wellhead body.
Eni-Agip uses the compact wellhead system in development drilling operations.
The concept is quite different from that already described in section 15 and is similar to
subsea wellhead systems from which the compact head was developed.
Each manufacturer has its own particular product which differs from other manufacturers.
Considering the number of different varieties available, it is not possible to provide a unique
assembling procedure for all the existing unitised or compact wellhead types in this manual.
figure 15.j and figure 15.k show a typical examples of compact systems. For specific running
procedures reference should always be made to the well specific Drilling Programme and
manufacturer's instructions.
Technical advantages of the compact wellhead are:
Elimination of the rig time lost in nippling-up or down the BOPs, which is normally
associated with conventional wellhead spools.
Once the pack-off is set, the BOP can be tested.
No crossover adapters are required.
The stack-up height is greatly reduced by the elimination of the casing and
tubing spools.
3
The Well is under BOP control from the time the 13 /8 BOP stack is installed on
the Compact Wellhead to the time the Xmas tree is installed.
A generic installation procedure for a typical compact wellhead is:

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Cut all of the conductor pipe of the platform at the same level, in order to be able to
use the same landing string throughout.
Prior to running each casing size, run the appropriate hanger and landing string in
order to measure and mark by painting the landing string, at the drill floor level.
Prior to running the wellhead, remove all lateral studs (if present), avoiding any
damage during the handling and running operations.
If the compact wellhead system has some anchor screws to energise the pack off (e.g.
the Breda type), remove the anchor screws after each cement job and visually check
the hanger position.
If the surface casing is cemented using plugs and not with an inner string, the running
tool must be equipped with an extension sleeve (bore protector), covering the entire
internal body and allowing the running of the plugs. If a bore protector is not available,
consider the possibility of welding a wear bushing (or similar) below the running tool.
Before running the casing, it is recommended to clean the hanger seat using an
appropriate washing tool.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
8)
190 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
7)
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Always clean the inside of the wellhead after each cement job, opening all the ports
and flushing with water. If the wellhead system utilises a pack off installed after the
casing cementation, run an appropriate washing tool to clean the pack off seat
immediately after the cement job.
A compact emergency slip suspension system and emergency sealing assembly (with
appropriate running procedures) must be available on the rig prior to starting
operations. A back-up set of O ring and sealing elements to re-dress all testing tools,
running and retrieving tools, etc. must be available on the rig before operations start.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
191 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Figure 15.J - Wellhead Unitised 3,000 psi WP
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
192 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Figure 15.K - Wellhead SMS 13 5/8 10,000 psi WP Assembly
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
193 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
15.5.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
MUDLINE SUSPENSION
The Mudline Suspension system is a method for supporting the weight of casing at the sea
bed (mudline) while drilling from a jack-up (Refer to figure 15.l and figure 15.l).
It offers a method of disconnection for all casing strings, allowing the temporary
abandonment of the well in the minimum of time and without having to cut the casings.
The casing strings extend from the mudline back to the drilling unit. Conventional land type
wellhead and BOPs are installed for well control during drilling operations.
The system utilises simple fluted landing rings or expanding collets in which the hangers are
landed. Each casing string is supported at the mudline by a mudline casing hanger. The
running tools or the tieback tools connect the mudline casing hangers with the casing string
above (landing string).
Running tools used in the mudline system, include a square bottom thread, to install it into
the hangers and seal, to maintain the pressure integrity of the running tool mudline hangers.
The connection of the running tools is the casing thread as per the users requirement.
Washout ports, located in the mudline hanger or in the running tool, ensure thorough
flushing of the annulus. The Washout ports are exposed by a partial rotation of the running
tool. When the washout ports are closed the pressure integrity of the casing is provided by
the seals of the running tool.
When temporarily abandoning a well, the casing landing string is retrieved by disconnecting
the running tools. Corrosion caps used in temporary well abandonment may be installed at
this time.
Any, or all, of the casing strings can be re-installed back to a conventional land type
production tree, installed on a production platform wellhead deck, by means of tie-back tools.
3
Metal to metal seals between the tieback tool of 13 /8 or smaller mudline casing hangers
provide a permanent pressure seal for the producing life of the well.
Eni-Agip have used a mudline completion system enabling a well to be drilled using a Jackup drilling equipment and afterwards completing it with a subsea production system.
Each mudline suspension manufacturer produces its own product different from those of
competitors. Considering the great number of different features, it is not possible to provide
a unique assembling procedure for all the existing mudline suspension system in this
manual. For the installation procedure, refer to the Drilling Programme and manufacturers
operating procedures.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
194 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Figure 15.L - MLL Mudline Casing Suspension System
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
195 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Figure 15.M - The MLC Mudline Suspension System
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
196 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140

1)
The Well programme will define the 30 casing string assembly including the type of
connections, mudline landing ring space out and mudline landing ring final position.
It is recommended to weld the 30 landing ring in such a way that its final position is at
least 5m below the seabed with the squnch joint releasable connection at least 2m
above the seabed (Refer to figure 15.n).
A driveable Remote Releasable Connection may be installed on the landing joint which
avoids sending divers to the sea floor to release the connector for abandonment (Refer
to figure 15.o).
2)
3)
4)
5)
The 30 landing ring depth will be checked, after running the 30 CP, using a special
26 skirted bit. Ensure tools are adjusted to the ID of the mudline landing ring.
Prior to the commencing the operation, ensure that all necessary equipment and tools
required are onboard. Check part numbers, condition, dimensions, general
compatibility with of the tools and equipment the casing and well requirements, tested
and in good serviceable condition.
A complete back up set of seals and O rings and adequate casing pup joints, needed
to space-out the running tools, must be available onboard.
All running tools or tieback tools should be assembled to the respective hangers to
confirm that there is no damage due to previous use or improper handling. Ensure all
seals and O rings are removed from the running/tieback tools before making them up.
Running tools should then be removed and new seals fitted. The threads should then
lubricated and protected by storing in the proper handling case.
Before running the casing it is recommended that the mudline casing hanger and the
running tool be made up to the casing joints or casing pup joint, and laid out on the
pipe rack. Alternatively they may be joined together and racked back in the derrick.
Before making up the running tool to the mudline casing hanger reconfirm that both
seal and O rings are intact and undamaged. Thread and seal areas should be
greased following the manufacturers requirements (avoid the use of pipe or thread
compound).
Ensure that the hanger is correctly and fully made up to the running tool.
Care must be taken in handling all equipment so that the rig tongs are not placed on
any threaded area, seal area, collet or dog ring.
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
The Casing landing string should be spaced with the wellhead to ensure that any
coupling are be a min of 2m away from the casing hanging point. Casing pup joints,
will be used if necessary.
Prior to running the casing, make a wiper trip to TD, reaming any tight spots and
cleaning out any hole fill.
5
When pulling out of the hole prior to running 9 /8 or smaller casing, pull the bit to the
mudline suspension point and wash with the maximum flow rate possible at the casing
hanger suspension point, to ensure that the landing or suspension profile is flushed.
If available, the proper hanger landing profile clean-out tool should be used. This tool
ensures the full cleaning of the landing profile.
The correct casing torque must be applied to the casing landing string, as the string
may have to be rotated in both directions during subsequent operations.
Operation of mud line running, cementing, flushing through washing ports, mud line
testing, well abandonment or tie back procedures must be strictly conducted as per
manufacturers instructions.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
197 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
11)
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Ensure that there is no cement in the 30-20 annulus above the running tool after the
cement job, flushing the annulus through the mudline washing ports is essential.
3
In addition two tubing strings of 2 /8 OD should be run down to the 20 mudline hanger
during the cement job to wash out the annulus in case the mudline washout ports have
not opened. This system has a disadvantage of impeding the closure of the diverter, so
precautions have to be adopted.
It is recommended that five to ten barrels of flushing fluid are spotted in the hanger
with cement retarder after washing, to help in avoiding early setting of any cement
contamination.
12)
The washout ports are opened by rotation of the landing string.

It is important to have the weight of the casing landing string in neutral, at the running
tool.
Close attention should be paid to casing string rotation, torque and vertical movement
of the casing string, to ensure that the correct measurements are achieved and the
operations are performed properly.
At the end of the operation the washing ports of the running tool must be re-closed by
the manufacturers procedures and torque figures. Do not over-torque especially if
elastomer seals are used.
If during the tightening up of the running tool there is any indication of casing backing
out, disconnect the running tool and pull out the casing landing string to check all
casing connections. Examine the running tool threads and inspect and replace all Orings/seals if necessary, prior to running back in the hole.
13)
14)
After tightening up of the running tool the integrity of the casing must be verified by
pressure testing to the required pressure value as per the Well Programme.
Measurement of the mud line position (hanger land-off point and top of casing hanger)
must be recorded on the well report for landing subsequent casing strings and for
future corrosion cap/tieback operations.
The well report should specifically include full details of operation, number of turns,
torque, etc. also for future installations of a corrosion cap/tieback operations.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
198 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Figure 15.N - CP Mud Line Suspension
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
199 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Figure 15.O - Remote Realisable Connectors
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
200 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
15.5.2. Temporary Abandonment Procedure.

It is assumed that the well has been plugged and secured and that wellhead and all surface
equipment have been removed.
The casing landing strings are recovered. Retrieve the last casing running tool and install the
appropriate corrosion cap. Repeat the procedure in the same way for the outer casing. In
this way the next largest casing will provide adequate guidance for the corrosion caps.
Casing spears are used to apply torsion at the very top of each casing landing string for
backing out the running tools. It is important to pick up the weight of the casing landing
string, in order to place the running tool in neutral.
Corrosion caps will be run with DP or HW using the appropriate J slot running tools. Check
the RKB measurements for calculating the corrosion cap running string. Measurements must
be recorded on the well report for future use when the well is to be re-entered.
The well report should to include full details of the operations, number of turns, torque, etc.
for future use in corrosion cap/tieback operations.
Recovered mud line running tools must be careful cleaned and inspected to confirm that
there is no damage. All O rings /seals must be checked for cuts, age or heat cracks, loss of
elasticity or change in hardness due to age or type of exposure. Damaged O rings / seals
must be replaced. Threads should then lubricated and protected by storing in the proper
handling case for future use.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
IDENTIFICATION CODE
PAGE
201 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
16.
DRILLING PROBLEMS
16.1.
STUCK PIPE
The following is a list of the different types of pipe sticking which can occur due to:
Differential sticking.
Hole restriction.
Caved in hole.
Hole irregularities and/or change in BHA.
It is impossible to lay down hard rules which will successfully cover all cases. however, for
each situation, indications about the possible causes of the problem, preventive measures
and remedial actions are listed in the following subsections.
Detailed procedure should be based on each particular case, evaluating every aspect of the
problem and applying any past experience gained in the area concerned.
16.1.1. Differential Sticking
Causes
This phenomenon can occur, where there is case of high differential pressure between the
mud hydrostatic pressure and the formation pore pressure. Some indications of pipe
becoming differentially stuck may be:
The string becomes stuck in front of a porous formation.

Pipe has not been moved for a period of time before getting stuck i.e. during a
pipe connection.
Circulation is free with no pressure variation.
A normal amount of cuttings is observed at the shaker.
Preventive Measures
When conditions for a potential differential sticking are encountered, the risk can be
minimised by applying the following procedure:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Reduce the mud weight as much as possible, maintaining the minimum differential
pressure necessary for a safe trip margin.
Reduce the contact surface by using spiral type drill collars also called NWS (No Wall
Stick) and using a properly stabilised bottom hole assembly. A shorter BHA with a
greater number of HWDP could be considered.
Use mud with minimum solids content and low filtrate in order to obtain a thinner wall
cake.
Reduce the friction factor by adding lubricants to the mud.
Keep the pipe moving and in rotation as much as possible.
Consider the use of a drilling jar/bumper.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
202 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Methods of Freeing Pipe

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Work the pipe applying cyclic slack-off and overpull combined with torque. Always
check the reduction in the pipe yield stress due to the application of the torque.
Spot oil-base mud, or oil containing a surfactant around the drill collars.
Reduce the mud weight, if possible.
Use a drilling jar/bumper.
Conduct a DST procedure.
Note:
16.2.
Quick actions are fundamental in freeing the wall of stuck drill pipe, since
the problem gets worse with time.
STICKING DUE TO HOLE RESTRICTION

Causes
The most common causes of hole restriction:
Too thick a wall cake due to the use of high solids /high filtrate mud in front of
porous and permeable formations.
Swelling of formations containing clay.
Extrusion of gumbo shale into the wellbore in underbalance situations.
Preventive Measures
Problems are usually suspected by increase in drag during connections. Once the cause
is recognised to be any of the three previously listed, the following actions should be
undertaken:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Reduce mud filtrate, cake and solids content.

Use inhibited mud.
Increase mud weight.
Increase mud clearing capacity.
Increase flow rate.
In all situations, frequent wiper trips can reduce the problem and provide information on the
severity.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Work the pipe applying slack-off if the string has become stuck pulling out, and
overpull if it stuck while running in.
Spot a cushion to break and remove the mud cake around the drill collars.
Increase the mud weight, if possible.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
203 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
16.3.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
STICKING DUE TO CAVING HOLE

Causes
This problem is mainly experienced in shale sections. The most common causes are:
Hydration and swelling of clay minerals when in contact with fresh mud filtrate.
Insufficient supporting action of the mud hydrostatic column.
Mechanical action of the drill string.
Preventive Measures
Depending on the various causes, there are different prevention possibilities, to reduce the
severity of the problem and to avoid the consequences of sticking the string.
Possible mud changes are:
Note:
Reduce water losses.

Lower pH value to 8.5 to 9 (if needed).
Use inhibited mud.
Add mud stabilising compounds (mainly sodium asphalt sulphonate).
Increase the mud weight.
It is not always drilling in underbalance which results in a caving hole.
Increase the Y/PV ratio to create laminar flow on the wall after pipe.
Increase the gel value to obtain a good cutting suspension when circulation is
stopped.
Possible BHA changes are:
Use bits without nozzles, particularly when reaming, to avoid scouring the well.
Use the minimum acceptable number of stabilisers.
Possible changes in parameters are:
Reduce rotary speed, if possible, to 80rpm or less.

Reduce the mud flow rate to obtain laminar flow in the annulus between hole and
drill collars.
Avoid long circulation times across unstable sections.
Do not rotate pipe when tripping. Use a spinner or chain out.
Trip out with care to avoid swabbing. If any swabbing occurs, pull out with the
kelly on.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
204 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Note:
If circulation is possible, continue circulating trying to expel the caving.

If the string becomes stuck across a carbonate formation, spot an acid pill.
If circulation is blocked, try to regain it by applying pressure shocks and working
the pipe at the same time. Special care is required to avoid breaking the
formation i.e. overcoming fracture gradient below the stuck point.
The problem of pipe sticking due to cuttings dropping out is not
necessarily related to a caving hole. The origin of such problems can also
be an excessive rate of penetration in large holes and inadequate carrying
capacity of the mud. In this case, change the mud properties, flow rate
and if necessary, limit the rate of penetration.
It is good practice to spot high viscosity pills from time to time to keep the hole clean.
The methods of getting pipe free in this situation are the same as listed above.
16.3.1. Sticking Due To Hole Irregularities And/Or Change In BHA
Causes
The causes for sticking, related to, hole conditions and change in BHA, are:
Dog legs.
Key seats.
New bit is run following a dulled bit which was undersize.
New stabilisers run to replace previous worn stabilisers.
String is stiffer than the previous one.
Rock bit run after a diamond or a core bit.
Preventive Measures
The formation of dog legs can be prevented by the use of packed bottom hole
assemblies.
Dog legs can be eliminated by using very stiff BHA's and reamers.
A key seat can be eliminated by reaming it with a key seat wiper or an undergauge stabiliser installed on the top of the drill collars.
Always ream a whole interval drilled with the previous bit.
Always ream the cored section, even if a full gauge core bit was used.

1)
2)
3)
Work the pipe applying slack-off if dog leg or key seat (the string becomes stuck
pulling out) and overpull if running a new BHA (the string becomes stuck while running
in the hole).
Spot an oil-based mud or oil containing a surfactant around the stuck point.
If the stuck point is in a calcareous section, spot an acid pill.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
205 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
16.4.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
OIL PILLS
Depending on the specific gravity of the mud in the hole, two different types of oil pill can be
used.
16.4.1. Light Oil Pills

To be used for mud specific gravity up to 1350g/l (11.3 PPG).
3
The standard pill will be obtained adding 10 to 30 l/m of surfactant to oil (diesel oil, crude oil
or used engine oil).
The procedure for the use of pill is the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
The pill volume shall be at least twice the volume of DC-open hole annulus (take into
account excess for compensating hole enlargement).
Pump at the maximum practical rate.
In order to have a pill volume in the annulus displace 1.3 times the volume of the DCopen hole.
At 30 to 60 minutes intervals circulate out of the string batches, as a balanced plug.
Work the string at the same time.
Repeat the procedure if the pill does not succeed (the pill may be active for 4 to 16
hours).
16.4.2. Heavy Oil Pills

To be used for mud of a specific gravity greater than 1350g/l (11,3 PPG).
For pill preparation clean a mud pit and mix (the ratios among the various components varies
depending on the required density):
Fresh water
Calcium chloride
Diesel oil (maximum 200l/minute)
Emulsifier (maximum 1 sack/minute) to be added at the same time as the diesel
Viscosifier (heavy stirring for at least 15 minutes is required)
Barite.
While mixing, continuous agitation is compulsory.

The procedure for the use of the pill will be the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Note:
The pill volume will be at least twice the volume between the drill collars and the open
hole (take into account excess for compensating hole enlargement).
Pump a cushion of diesel oil with 5% Free Pipe, or similar, ahead and behind of pill.
Pump at the maximum practical rate.
In order to have a pill volume in the annulus displace 1.3 times the volume of DC-open
hole.
At 2 to 3 hr intervals, circulate batches of 300 to 600l out of the string.
Work the string at the same time.
Repeat the procedure if the pill results are ineffective (the pill may be active for 20 to
48 hours).
When the oil pill is circulated out of the hole it shall be recovered and
stored separately.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
206 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Note:
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Take into account the influence of the pill on the hydrostatic pressure.
16.4.3. Acid Pills

The use of acid pills can be successful if the string gets stuck across of a carbonate
formation. Considering the risks related to this operation, this should be carried out only if
other methods prove to be ineffective.
Decisions concerning pill's characteristics (volume, compositions, strength,

displacement schedule, etc.) shall be taken on a case by case situation, after
consultation with the Company Drilling Office.
Whichever recipe is adopted, consideration has to be given to the corrosion
problem. The proper amount of corrosion inhibitor shall be used and the acid pill
will be spaced with oil or water ahead and behind.
Due to the acid reaction, gaseous products develop in the well, and special care
is required when circulating out the pill. It may be necessary to circulate through
the choke and line up the surface equipment to safely dispose of the gas.
While displacing the acid in front of the formation, the gaseous product will cool
off the drill string. To avoid breaking, do not work the string but only apply an
overpull or slack off.
As a result of the acid action, the permeability of the formation will increase, thus
creating the conditions for possible mud losses.
Whenever acid is handled, the appropriate safety measures shall be adopted:
Wear gloves and protective clothing and have eyes protected with goggles.
Ensure there are safety showers available for any personnel who come into
contact with acid.
Have water sprays ready to wash spilled acid.
Ensure proper ventilation if the pill is mixed in a closed area.
16.4.4. Free Point Location

If it is confirmed that it is not possible to free the string by working the pipe, spotting oil or
acid pills, the string shall be backed-off in order to allow proceeding with a different method
such as running jars wash pipes, or abandon the hole and side-track.
There are two methods for estimating the depth at which a string is stuck:
Applying tension and measuring the pipe stretch.

Locating the tow point with a free-point indicating tool.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
207 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
16.4.5. Measuring The Pipe Stretch

A reasonable estimate of the depth at which the pipe is stuck can be obtained by
calculations using Hooke's Law. Applying two different tensile loads ( T1 < T2) to the drilling
string, two magnitudes of stretch (S1 < S2) are measured.
Calculating the differential stretch (E = S2 - S1), differential pull (P = T2 - T1) and applying
Hookes Law, it is possible to determine the depth of free point (L) using the following
formula.
SI UNITS
L=
26.374 x Wdp x E
P
where:
L=
735,294 x Wdp x E
P
where:
Length free pipe in m
Wdp
Plain end pipe weight in kg/m
Differential stretch in mm
API UNITS
Differential pull in kN
Length free pipe in ft
Wdp
Plain end pipe weight in lb/ft
Differential stretch in ins
Differential pull in lbs
The value obtained is less reliable as deviation increases due to downhole friction.
Another minor inaccuracy is introduced by neglecting the changing cross section of the
string at the tool joints.
16.4.6. Location By Free Point Indicating Tool
a)
A Free Point survey shall be run to select the back-off point.
b)
Free Point Indicators are essentially accurate strain gauges which measure
molecular rearrangement between drag springs, setting dogs or electromagnets.
c)
The tool is run on a logging cable through which measurements of torque and
stretch are sent to surface read-out instruments.
d)
The Free Point Indicator is lowered to various depths and, at each depth, tension
and torque are applied to the string at the surface. The strain gauge indicates
whether the pipe reacts at that depth to the applied tension and applied torque.
e)
The read-out of the instrument is given in percentage i.e. 100% represents

entirely free pipe.
f)
Pipe which appears to be free in tension does not always react to applied torque.
There is a greater chance of succeeding with the back-off if the pipe is free
under both tension and torque.
g)
Separate slim acoustic logs are designed to indicate intervals of stuck, partially
stuck or free pipe, which may exist below the upper stuck point.
h)
Interpretation of free point data is very subjective and susceptible to operator

skill, hole condition, etc.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
208 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
16.4.7. Back-Off Procedure

Drill pipe or drill collars can be unscrewed downhole by exploding a charge inside a selected
tool joint connection, close to the stuck point.
Requisites for a successful back-off are the following:
There must be sufficient minimum inside diameter.

The charge must be accurately placed across the connection.
There must be sufficient string shot strength (Refer to table 16.a).
Neutral or slightly positive tension is applied at the back-off point.
Sufficient left hand torque must be applied at the back off point.
As a general rule, the first attempt to back-off should be made at the first connection above
Free Point. If there is a failure, the second attempt should be performed on the first stand
above the Free Point. Subsequent attempts should be made moving upward one stand at a
time.
To ensure a safe operation, the Company Drilling and Completion Supervisor shall carry out
the following checks:
a)
Ensure that tong and slips dies are clean, sharp and the proper size for the string
above the rotary table.
b)
The tongs, snub and jerk lines are in working condition.
c)
The slip handles are tied together with strong line, to prevent the slips being
kicked out of the table when the pipe break out.
d)
The elevators are latched around the pipe and loose under a tool joint with the
hook locked when torque is being applied to the string.
e)
Ensure that no resilient torque remains in the string when it is picked up out of
the slips, unless the pipe is properly held with a back-up tong.
f)
A wireline cutter must be on the rig floor during the entire operation.
A detailed standard back-off procedure cannot be used as there are too many variables.
The following is a typical generic procedure:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Keep non-essential personnel off the rig floor.

Install one or two Kelly Cocks on the pipe above rotary the table.
If it is required due to hole conditions, install a stuffing box and pump in sub.
Tighten up all string connections applying right hand torque (max. 80% of nominal
value). The torque should be worked down the string. This procedure should be
repeated 4 to 5 times especially in crooked or deviated holes.
Install the back-off tool in the string and run in the hole to around 150-300ft (50-100m)
below the rotary table.
Pick up the string to have a hook load equal to the weight, in air, of the pipe above the
selected back-off point, plus 10 to 15%.
Apply left hand torque in a series of steps. Work the pipe at each step to transfer the
torque downhole.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
16.5.
209 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
8)
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
The maximum amount of left hand torque should be 80% of the maximum value used
for the right hand torque.
Once the right amount of left hand torque is applied, run the Back-off tool to the Backoff point.
Pull the drill string out of the hole. Fire the charge when across of the selected joint
connection and retrieve the tool.
Pull The string out of the hole.
After the firing of the charge, if the connection has failed to back-off, continue to work
the torque down the string before trying another string shot.
If the operation is unsuccessful, release the left hand torque, circulate to clean the
string from back-off debris and start again from step 4 and attempt a new back-off.
Note:
The Backing-off of drill collar connections should be performed by

following the same procedure. Problems may arise due to the difficulty in
identifying the Free Point and with higher left hand torque required.
Note:
In directional wells with high drift angles where it is difficult to transmit

torque down to the stuck point, cutting techniques should be considered.
FISHING
16.5.1. Inventory Of Fishing Tools

The following tools shall be always available on the rig for the various hole sizes drilled:
Fishing jars to match the drill collars in use.

Bumper subs to match the drill collars in use.
Overshot and oversize guides with grapples, baskets and extension subs, to
catch all diameters of tools in hole.
Taper taps for drill pipe body and tool joints (this is a poor class of tool: overshots
are preferable if available).
Junk baskets or Globe-type baskets.
Reverse circulation junk baskets.
Junk subs.
Fishing magnets.
Milling tools.
1
Re-dressing tools for 5" and 3 /2" sheared DP.
Impression blocks.
Fishing tools to catch electrical log tools (supplied by electrical log contractor)
and relevant crossover.
Safety joints.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
210 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
16.5.2. Preparation
Before fishing operations begin, the following preparations shall be carried out:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Apply the greatest accuracy to all measurements.

Draw a complete sketch of the equipment to be run, specifying lengths, inside and
outside diameters and a description of each tool.
Make sure that the Contractor's personnel directly involved in operations are fully
familiar with equipment to be used and have knowledge of limitations.
The fishing equipment should arrive to the rig fully inspected. Further inspection and
maintenance shall be carried out on the rig if in prolonged use.
Keep mud properties in good conditions at all times.
Keep rig equipment in good working conditions at all times.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
211 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Depth From Surface in feet

Pipe OD ins
3
2 /8
7
2 /8
1
Tubing
3 /2
1
4 to 4 /2
3
2 /8 to /8
1
3 /2 to 4
1
Drillpipe
4 /2 to 6 /16
5
6 /8
1
3 /2 to 4
1
4 /8 to 5 /5
Drill Collar
5 /4 to 7
1
7 /4 to 8 /2
0 to 3,000
3,000 to
6,000
6,000 to
9,000
9,000 to
12,000
Over
12,000
2-3
3-4
4-6
3-4
4-6
5-8
3-4
4-6
5-9
6-12
4-5
5-7
6-10
7-14
2-4
2-5
3-7
3-8
4-9
2-4
3-6
4-8
4-10
5-12
3-6
4-8
5-10
6-12
7-15
4-6
5-9
6-12
7-15
8-18
6-12
8-12
8-15
8-18
7 /4 to 9 /4
Casing
4 /2 to 5 /2
6 to 7
7 /8
7 /8
9 /8
10 /4
Table 16.A - Recommended Strands of 80gr/ft RDX Primacord for String-Shot
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
212 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
16.5.3. Fishing Assembly

The standard fishing assembly consists of the following:
16.6.
Fishing tool + Jar and Bumper Sub + Drill Collars + Heavy Weight Drill Pipe +
Drill Pipe.
Use as many drill collars as is in the fish. If the required number of drill collars is
not available on the rig, use a jar accelerator.
A Safety Joint should not be run. Since the Safety Joint will not transmit left hand
torque, it would not be possible to back-off below it using a string shot.
However, a Safety Joint could be run between the catching tool and the jar when
a non releasing tool such as taper tap is being employed.
Avoid any restrictions in the bore of tools run above the catching tool, which
would prevent the use of a cutting tool or the back-off shot within the fish.
Where losses are expected the use of a Circulation Sub in the fishing assembly
should be considered.
FISHING PROCEDURES
16.6.1. Overshot
1)
Plan the operation taking into account the following factors:
The catching action of the tool will stress the fish neck in words.
A regular, smooth shape of the fish neck is necessary for a successful operation.
Jarring is only possible only using type SFS, FS and XFS overshots.
If the fish diameter is near the maximum catch or size, a spiral grapple is
recommended. On the other hand, if the fish diameter is considerably below the
maximum catch size, a basket grapple is preferable.
If the hole is enlarged, use an oversize guide or run a bent drill pipe just above
the overshot.
When the fish has been milled over, if possible, run an overshot extension to
avoid catching the fish by the milled part.
2)
3)
Run the fishing assembly, space out as required, and make up the kelly.
Lower the overshot to just above the fish and circulate for a few minutes to clean the
top of the fish. Do not circulate excessively to as this may enlarge the hole.
Prior to engaging the fish, record the weight of fishing string (up, down and rotating)
with and without circulation.
To engage a fish, the fishing string is lowered and rotated to the right very slowly,
pumping at minimum rate. During the engaging operation, continuously monitor the
weight indicator and stand pipe pressure.
As the fish is engaged, allow the right hand torque to slack out and pull on the fish
picking up rapidly the fishing string 5 to 8ft (2 to 3m). Drop the string 2 to 4ft
(approximately 1m) and catch it in the brake to make sure that there is a firm grip.
If possible, it should be considered to circulate bottoms up through the fish before
pulling out of hole, particularly if potential reservoirs are exposed or penetration rates
were high.
4)
5)
6)
7)
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
9)
213 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
8)
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
When tripping out of the hole with the fish, the string must not be rotated, a chain or
Kelly Spinner should be used.
If pulling out of the hole wet, flow checks shall be carried out frequently.
16.6.2. Releasing Spear

1)
Plan this operation taking into account the following factors:
The fish will be stressed outwards due to the catching action of the tool.
A regular, smooth shape of the fish is essential for a successful operation.
To allow unlatching of the spear, if it is not possible to run an adequate number

of drill collars above the releasing spear, the use of a bumper sub is
recommended.
Install a pack-off on the tool, if circulation is required after latching the fish.
Use the fishing jar If jarring is required. In this case the use of a Spear Stop is
required. Check the Spear Stop OD when it is used in open hole and use the
stop only if hole condition permits.
2)
Perform the fishing job as per overshot procedure.
16.6.3. Taper Tap

1)
Plan this operation taking into account the following factors:
The size of the taper tool should be selected in order to engage the fish with the
middle of the tapered point.
The taper taps do not allow free passage to the back-off tool.
Excessive torque can damage the tapered thread and swell the top of the fish.
It is nigh impossible to release the tool once engaged. For this reason its use has
to be considered the last resort and only used after consultation with Eni-Agip
Shore Base (Drilling Manager/Superintendent).
2)
Run the fishing assembly, complete with safety joint, space out as required and make
up the Kelly.
Lower the catching tool to just above the fish and circulate a few minutes to clean the
top of the fish. Do not circulate excessively as this may enlarge the hole.
To engage the fish, apply right hand torque. A gradual increase of back torque is an
indication of successful operation.
Chain or spin the pipe out of hole with the fish.
3)
4)
5)
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
214 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
16.6.4. Junk Basket

1)
2)
3)
This procedure is more successful in soft formations.

A reverse circulation type junk basket is preferred to a forward circulation type.
Use the following parameters:
WOB = 2 to 4t
Rotary = 45rpms
1
Low Pump Rate ( /2 pump rate while drilling).
4)
Core approximately 20cm. Pick up to allow the junk on the side of the basket to fall into
the pilot hole, then proceed coring a further +/-50cm.
Pull the junk basket out of the hole
After use, careful inspection and refurbishment is necessary.
5)
6)
16.6.5. Fishing Magnet

Magnets can be successfully used but only in hard formations to retrieve small steel objects
such as bit cones, bearings, slips, tong pins and milling cuttings.
To avoid sticking the fish in the hole, weight must not be applied.
Fishing magnets may be run on wireline or on pipe. Wireline operations have the advantage
of speed and economy. Pipe operations has the great advantage of utilising the circulation
holes in the magnet to remove settling above the fish.
16.7.
MILLING PROCEDURE
There is a wide variety of mills specifically designed for various applications. Mills are
available in two basic categories: hydraulically activated mills and fixed milling tools.
A Section Mill is a hydraulically actuated tool and is used to mill out a complete section of
casing. Downhole section milling of casing, is generally done for the following reasons:
To mill a section of casing that permits side-tracking in any direction.

To mill the perforated zone in a production casing string or to expose cased off
formations. The formations may be then underreamed and gravel packed past
the original completion.
The most commonly used Fixed Mills are:

Junk Mills
Used to mill all type of junk, including rock bit cones, reamers
cutters, items dropped through the rotary, drill pipe cemented
inside and outside, etc.
Pilot Mills
Designed to mill drill pipe, casing, tubing, wash pipe, safety

joint, swaged casing, etc.
Taper Mills
Generally used to eliminate restrictions or to mill through

collapsed casing.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
215 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Washover Shoes
Designed to mill away formation or tool obstructions such as

stabiliser blades, reamer cutters, expanded packers and bit
bodies which may be holding the drill or tubing string in the
hole
Special Mills (Window

mills, Watermelon
mills, etc.)
For casing side-tracking systems.
The following are general guidelines for the use of milling tools:
a)
Milled cuttings are much heavier than drilling cuttings. Therefore, mud viscosity
should be increased or high viscosity pills should be pumped to help in carrying
the steel cuttings out of the hole.
b)
Oil based mud has poor carrying capabilities and should be avoided whenever
possible. Polymer muds are most suitable for milling.
c)
Never mill faster than it is possible to remove the cuttings.
d)
Magnets placed in the flow line will help in removing metal particles from drilling
mud. Removal of mill cuttings and debris reduces the wear on mud pumps and
other equipment.
e)
A junk sub placed in the string above the mill can aid in catching the larger
cuttings.
f)
Whenever possible, a stabiliser should be run within 60 or 90ft (20-30m) above

the mill to prevent it from moving eccentrically.
g)
The stabiliser OD should not exceed the dressed OD of the mill.
h)
Always start rotating, with low rpm about 3ft (1m) above the fish. Lower onto the
fish and adjust the weight and the rotary speed to obtain satisfactory penetration.
i)
Generally the most efficient milling rates are obtained by running the rotary at 80
to 100rpm. Milling with washover shoes is an exception and are usually more
efficient at speeds of 60 to 80rpm. Continuously monitor the torque indicator
during milling operations.
j)
Reading the cuttings is essential to evaluate the performance of the mill. The
1
1
ideal cuttings are usually /32" to /16" thick and 1" to 2" long. If cuttings are thin
long stringers, penetration rates are probably too low and weight on the mill
should be increased. If fish-scale type cuttings are being returned, penetration
rate will improve by decreasing weight and increasing rpm.
k)
The type and stability of the fish (cemented or not) together with the hardness of
the fish and/or cement are factors that affect milling rates.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
216 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
16.8.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
JARRING PROCEDURE
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Note:
Jarring should be done with a Kelly or Top Drive. If the use of a Kelly is not possible,
secure the elevator latch by using a piece of rope or chain.
Prior to jarring check the drill line sensor. Ensure the weight indicator readings are
accurate and that the Dead Line Anchor is secure and free of debris. Check the derrick
and all equipment for any loose items.
When jarring, the drill floor must be cleared of all non-essential personnel.
Prior to jarring, mark the drill string at the rotary table.
Check the drill line usage, slip and cut if necessary. When sustained jarring is carried
out, the drill line should be slipped at regular intervals, depending on the particular
situation. Also check the derrick, lifting equipment and travelling block attachment
bolts.
Always allow the jars to trip within their safe working load. Wait until the jars have
tripped before pulling the string further. Never exceed the safe working limit without
confirmation that the jars have tripped.
If a top drive system is used, after jarring, check the TDS as per the maintenance and
operating specification.
For details on jarring procedures, refer to Drilling Jar Acceptance And
Utilisation Procedures (STAP-M-1-M-5003).
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
IDENTIFICATION CODE
PAGE
217 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
17.
LOST CIRCULATION
When lost circulation is encountered, some specific information regarding the situation is
required prior to initiating corrective procedures.
First, it is necessary to determine the magnitude of the losses. These may vary from minor
seepage losses to partial and complete loss of returns.
Second, the condition at the time of losses may proved an indication of the reasons for the
lost of circulation. Losses during tripping are usually due to running pipe too quickly. During
drilling, a change in drilling rate or change in Ethnology from cuttings indicates either a
weaker, porous formation or a fault had been encountered. Mud weight and viscosity have
also have increased.
Third, it is necessary to locate the zone where the losses are occurring. If the losses are not
on the bottom, at the casing shoe or at the last previous zone (if any), a temperature survey
or gamma ray log may be run to accurately locate the zone.
17.1.
LOSS PREVENTIVE MEASURES

The depths where losses can be expected for each particular well, are usually predicted in
the Drilling Programme, if enough information is available.
If thief zones are likely to be encountered, the following procedure should be adopted:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
Keep the mud weight as low as possible but still providing an adequate overbalance.
Control the ROP to prevent overloading the annulus with cuttings which could result in
increased mud densities and/or constrict the annulus.
Maintain a low yield point and gel strength of mud.
Avoid excessive circulation rates.
Run the pipe slowly to minimise pressure surges.
Break circulation by first rotating away and reciprocating the pipe, then starting the
pump slowly.
Avoid pump surge.
Do not use diamond bits.
14
Use bit nozzles larger than /32" ID.
Have an adequate stock of LCM on the rig.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
218 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
17.1.1. REMEDIAL ACTION (WHILE DRILLING)

As soon as any irregularity is observed in the mud returns, the following procedure should be
conducted:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Check the surface equipment for leaks.

Run a subsea TV or ROV down the length of the marine riser, flex joint and BOP stack
on both sides. When there is doubt or visibility is poor, close the BOP rams and check
if the level still drops when the hole is isolated from the riser system.
If still losing mud, stop pumping and observe the well.
If the level remains static, the mud weight or viscosity may need to be reduced slightly
and/or slight treatment with lost circulation material if required.
If the level drops, the well must be kept full with mud or water, depending on the
severity of the losses. An estimate can be made of the maximum weight the formation
can withstand, measuring the volume of water required and calculating the new mud
gradient. Circulation may be restarted by any or combination of the following means:
Reduce flow rate (if possible).

Reduce mud weight (if possible).
Add LCM to the mud (the shale shaker must be by-passed).
Wait for the formation to "heal".
Spot a plug of thick mud and LCM at the thief zone.
Spot a plug of dehydratable material containing LCM into the mud losses zone.
Squeeze diesel oil bentonite (DOB) or diesel oil bentonite cement (DOBC) pills.
Plug the thief zone with a gelled slurry.
The choice of the various possibilities listed above shall be submitted for evaluation of the
well conditions on a case by case situation.(Refer to trouble shooting guides Mud Manual
STAP l N 6051 Lost Circulation)
17.2.
USE OF DOB AND DOBC PILLS

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Note:
If the tripping is considered safe (i.e. the hole stands full of mud), run open ended drill
pipe to 10 to 30m above the thief zone.
Pump the pill and displace it with mud to the bottom of the string.
Close the BOP and squeeze pump down the annulus and the pipe at the same time.
The flow rate shall be the same in both the annulus and in the drill pipe if DOB pills are
being used. In case of DOBC pills, the flow rate in the annulus shall be half the flow
rate in the drill pipe being used
2
Beware of fracturing the formation, do not exceed 500psi (35 kg/cm ).
Open the BOP and pull out of hole. Do not reverse out.
During this operation, reciprocate the string from time to time. If drag
occurs, pull out the string is free before proceeding with a squeeze.
Flush the mixing tank, cementing unit and lines with diesel oil in order to
remove the presence of any water before mixing and pumping DOB or
DOBC pills.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
219 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
17.3.
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
REMEDIAL ACTION (WHILE TRIPPING)

As soon as any irregularity is noticed in filling the hole, the following general procedure
should be carried out:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
17.4.
Check the trip tank system for leakage.

Run a subsea TV or ROV down the length of the marine riser, flex joint and BOP stack
on both sides. When there is doubt or visibility is poor, close the BOP rams and check
if the level still drops when the hole is isolated from the riser system.
If there is still mud losses, the cause of the lost circulation may be pressure surges due
to running in the pipe too fast or the bit/stabilisers have balled up. Stop tripping and
circulate the well.
If full returns are observed, trip to bottom.
If full returns are not established, the well must be kept full with mud or water,
depending on the severity of the losses. Circulation may be restarted by one of the
methods listed previously.
USE OF LCM PILLS

1)
2)
3)
4)
If tripping is considered safe (i.e. the hole stands full of mud), run open ended drill pipe
to immediately above the thief zone.
3
Pump the LCM pill and displace half of it in the hole (minimum pill volume: 10m for a
1
3
1
8 /2" hole; 20m for a 12 /4" hole) and pull the pipe above the pill.
Continue pumping the rest of the pill using the Hesitation Technique and visually
check the fluid level all the time.
Repeat the procedure, if the previous was unsuccessful, change the type of LCM, if
necessary.
ARPO
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
220 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Appendix A - Report Forms

A.1
Initial Activity Report (ARPO 01)
District/Affiliate Company
DATE:
INITIAL ACTIVITY
REPORT
FIELD NAME
ARPO 01
Permit/Concession N
Cost center
Well Code
General Data
On shore
WELL NAME
Depth Above S.L .
Off shore
Joint venture
Ground Level[m]
AGIP:
Latitude:
Water Depth [m]
Longitude
Rotary Table Elev.[m]
Reference
First Flange[m]
Rig Name
Top housing [m]
Contractor
Ref. Rig RKB - 1st Flange
Rig Heading []
Program TD (Measured)
[m]
Program TD (Vertical)
[m]
Cellar Pit
Offset FROM the proposed location
%
%
Type of Operation
Reference Rig
Rig Type
%
%
Rig Pump
Depth [m]
Manufacturer
Distance [m]
Length [m]
Type
Direction []
Width [m]:
Liner avaible [in]

Major Contractors
Type of Service
Company
Contract N
Type of Service
Company
Contract N
Mud Logging
D. & C. Fluids
Cementation
Waste treatment
Operating Time
Jack-up leg Penetration
Supply Vessel for Positioning
Moving
[gg:hh]
Leg
Air gap
Penetration
Positioning
[hh:min]
[m]
[m]
Anchorage
[hh:min]
Rig-up
[hh:min]
Delay
[hh:min]
Lost-time Accidents
[hh:min]
Name
Horse
Bollard pull
Power
[t]
Rig Anchorage
Anchor
Bow
N
Angle
Mooring Line
Weight
Type & Manufacturer
[t]
Piggy Back
Length
Cable
Chain
[m]
[m]
Weight
N
[t]
Mooring Line
Chain
Cable
Length
Length
[m]
[mm]
[m]
[mm]
Tension Operative
Total
[Tested]
Tension
Time
[t]
[t]
[hh:min]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Note:
Supervisor
Superintendent
ARPO
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
A.2
221 OF 234
Daily Report (ARPO 02)
DAILY REPORT
WELL NAME
Drilling
FIELD NAME
DATE:
ARPO 02
Cost center
Rig Name
RT Elevation
[m]
Well Code
Type of Rig
Ground Lelel / Water Depth
[m]
Report N
Contractor
RT - 1st flange / Top Housing
[m]
Permit / Concession N
Well
Last casing
BOP
Next Casing
M.D. (24:00)
[m]
nom.[in]
Stack
T.V.D. (24:00)
[m]
Top [m]
Diverter
Total Drilled
[m]
Bottom [m]
Annular
Rotating Hrs
[hh:mm]
Top of Cmt [m]

Last Survey []
at m
LOT - IFT [kg/l]
at m
Reduce Pump Strockes Pressure

1
Pump N
Type
w.p. [psi]
of
Annular
R.O.P.
[m / h]
Upper Rams
Progressive Rot. hrs
[hh:mm]
Middle Rams
Back reaming Hrs
Middle Rams
Personnel
[hh:mm]
Injured
Middle Rams
Agip
Agip
Liner [in]
Lower Rams
Rig
Rig
Strokes
Press. [psi]
Last Test
Others
Total
Other
Total
Lithology
Shows
From (hr)
To (hr)
Op. Code OPERATION DESCRIPTION
Operation at 07:00
Mud type
Density
Viscosity
P.V.
Y.P.
Gel 10"/10'
Water Loss
HP/HT
Press.
Temp.
ClSalt
pH/ES
MBT
Solid
Oil/water Ratio.
Sand
pm/pom
pf
mf
Daily Losses
Progr. Losses
[kg/l]
[s/l]
[cP]
[g/100cm2]
/
[cc/30"]
[cc/30"]
[kg/cm2]
[C]
[g/l]
[g/l]
[kg/m3]
[%]
[%]
Bit
Data
Manuf.
Type
Serial No.
IADC
Diam.
Nozzle/TFA
From [m]
To [m]
Drilled [m]
Rot. Hrs.
R.P.M.
W.O.B.[t]
Flow Rate
Pressure
Ann. vel.
Jet vel.
HHP Bit
HSI
I
[m3]
[m3]
B
Run N
Run N
Bottom Hole Assembly N __________

Rot. hours
Description
Part. L
Progr.L Partial Progr.
Stock
Total Cost
O
G
D
O
L
R
I
B
O
G
D
O
L
R
Daily
Progr.
Quantity
UM
Supervisor:
Supply vessel
ARPO
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
A.3
222 OF 234
Casing Running Report (ARPO 03)
RUNNING CASING
REPORT
DATE:
Operation type
ARPO 03 / B
Casing type
WELL NAME
FIELD NAME
Cost center
Top [m]
[in]
Bottom [m]
Joint
Length
Progress.
centr.
Joint
Length
Progress.
centr.
Joint
Length
Progress.
centr.
[m]
[m]
(N)
[m]
[m]
(N)
[m]
[m]
(N)
Remarks:
Supervisor
Superintendent
ARPO
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
A.4
223 OF 234
Cementing Job Report (ARPO 04B)
CEMENTING JOB
REPORT
DATE:
WELL NAME
FIELD NAME
ARPO-04 / B
Operation type
Cost center
Stage / No.:
[in]
SQUEEZE / PLUG
Type
Length [m]
Cap.[ l/m]
Bottom [m]
Cement retainer
Manufacturer
Model / Type
Injectivity Test with:
[inch]
Pump Rate Testing Pr.

[l/min]
[kg/cm2]
Test
De
Squeeze packer
[kg/cm2]
Tot. Vol.
Final Sqz Pr.
pumped [l]
[kg/cm2]
[m
Returns V
[l]
[mins]
Stinger Pressure test

Annular pressure
CEMENTATION
[kg/cm2]
Operation (y/n)
Casing Reciprocation
Bump Plug
Casing testing pressure
Casing Rotation
Valve holding
Annulus pressurization
[mins]
Inner string
GENERAL DATA
Slurry Displacement
With
Losses [m 3]
To Surface
pumps
Density
Fluid type:
[kg/l]
pH
Dumped
[m3]
During csg run

Circulation
Volume
[m 3]
Mud
Mix/Pump Slurry
Density:
[kg/l]
Spacer
Displacement
[mins]
Slurry
Duration:
Final pressure:
Opening DV
[kg/cm2]
Circ. through DV
Total
Circulation / Displacement / Squeeze
Time [mins.]
Partial
Supervisor
Progr.
Flow Rate
Pressure
Total Volume
[l/min]
[kg/cm2]
[l]
Operation Description
Superintendent
Final Press.
Retur
[kg/cm 2]
Vol.
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
A.5
Bit Record (ARPO 05)
BIT
RECORD
DATE:
WELL NAME
FIELD NAME
ARPO-05
Cost center
Run n
Bit n
Bit size [in]
Bit manufacturer
Bit type
Special features codes
Serial number
IADC code
Depth in [m]
Depth out [m]
Drilled interval [m]
Rotation hrs
Trip hrs
R.O.P. [m/h]
Average W.O.B. [t]
Average R.P.M.
D.H.M. R.P.M.
Flow rate [l/min]
2
St. pipe pressure [kg/cm ]
D.H.M. Press. drop [kg/cm2]
Bit HHP
HSI
Annulus min vel. [m/min]
[1/32 in]
1
[1/32 in]
2
[1/32 in]
3
[1/32 in]
4
[1/32 in]
5
[1/32 in]
C
2
[in ]
T.F.A.
B Inner rows [I]
I Outher rows [O]
T Dull char. [D]
Location [L]
D Bearing/Seals [B]
U Gauge 1/16 [G]
L Other chars [O]
L Reason POOH [R]
Mud type
Mud density [kg/l]
Mud visc.
Mud Y.P.
Survey depth
Survey incl.
Bit Cost
J
E
T
S
Li
Type
Stabilizer
Distance
Diameter
from bit
[in]
[m]
tho
lo
gy
B
H
A
Currency
Pag.:
Supervisor
of:
224 OF 234
Superintendent
ARPO
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
A.6
225 OF 234
Waste Report (ARPO 6)
WASTE DISPOSAL
WELL NAME
Management Report
FIELD NAME
ARPO-06 Cost center
DATE:
Report[m]
N
From
Depth
Interval(m)
Drilled (m)
To [m]
Drilled Volume [m ]
Mud
Type
Density
(kg/l)
Phase size [in]
Cumulative volume [m ]
Cl- concentration (g/l )

3
Usage
Phase /Period [m ]
Water consumption
Fresh water
Recycled
Cumulative [m ]
Total
Fresh water
Recycled
Total
Mixing Mud
Others
Total
Fresh water [m ]
Readings / Truck
Mud Volume [m ]
Phase
Cumulative
Recycled [m ]
Service
Mixed
Contract N
Company
Mud Company
Lost
Waste Disposal
Dumped
Transportation
Transported IN
Transported OUT
Waste Disposal
Period
Water base cuttings
[t]
Oil base cuttings
[t]
Dried Water base cuttings
[t]
Dried oil base cuttings
[t]
Water base mud
[t]
Oil base mud transported IN
[t]
Oil base mud transported OUT
[t]
Drill potable water
[t]
Dehidrated water base mud
[t]
Dehidrated oil base mud
[t]
Sewage water
[t]
Transported Brine
[t]
Cumulative
Remarks
Remarks
Supervisor
Superintendent
ARPO
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
A.7
226 OF 234
Well Problem Report (ARPO 13)
WELL PROBLEM
REPORT
DATE:
Problem
WELL NAME
Cost center
Top [m]
Code
Well
ARPO -13
FIELD NAME
Start date
Bottom [m]
Situation
End date
Measured Depth
Top [m]
Vertical Depth
Bottom [m]
Top [m]
KOP
Bottom [m]
Open hole
Mud in hole
[m]
Max inclination []
Type
@m
Last casing
Dens.[kg/l]:
DROP OFF [m]
Well problem Description
Solutions Applied:
Results Obtained:
Solutions Applied:
Results Obtained:
Solutions Applied:
Results Obtained:
Solutions Applied:
Results Obtained:
Supervisor
Supervisor
Supervisor
Remarks at District level:
Superintendent
Lost Time
Remarks at HQ level
hh:mm Loss value [in currency]

Pag.
Of
ARPO
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
A.8
227 OF 234
Malfunction & Failure Report(FB-1)
MALFUNCTION & FAILURE REPORT

(FEED BACK REPORT 01)
District/Subsidiary
Report Date:
Well Name:
Well Code:
General Information
Contract No:
Service/Supply:
Drilling
Contract Type:
Completion
Workover
Contractor:
Duration Dates of Failure:
Distributed By:
RIG SITE
Description of Failure:
Drilling & Completions Company Man:

Adopted or Suggested Solution(s):
Contractor Contingency Measures:
Contractor Representative:
DISTRICT OR SUBSIDIARY NOTES:
Failure Classification
Status
Technical
Normal
Management/Organisation
Extreme
Safety/Quality
Innovative
Adverse
Operations Manager:
Time Lost:
Estimated Cost of Failure:
MILAN HEAD OFFICE NOTES:
Analysis Code:
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
228 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
A.9
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Contractor Evaluation (FB-2)
CONTRACTOR EVALUATION
(FEED BACK REPORT 02)
District/Subsidiary
Report Date:
Well Name:
Well Code:
General Information
Contract No.:
Contract Type:
Contractor:
Service/Supply:
Distributed By:
R1 Technical Requirements
FB_01 REPORT REFERENCES
FB Report No.:
Time Lost (Hr.Min):
Economic Cost (M):
Category
Evaluation Score (0-9)
Suitability of Equipment and Materials
Compliance of Equipment and Materials to the
Adequacy of Personnel
Meeting with Operational Programme Requirements
Meeting with Contract Operation Timings
Equipment Condition/Maintenance
R2 Management and Organizational Requirements
FB Report No.:
Time Lost (Hr.Min):
Economic Cost (M):
Category
Availability of Equipment and Materials
Technical and Operational Support to Operations
Capability and Promptness to Operational Requests
R3 Safety and Quality Assurance Requirements
FB Report No.:
Time Lost (Hr.Min):
Economic Cost (M):
Category
Meeting with the Contract Agreement DSS
Availability and Validity of Requested Certificates
Meeting with Contract Quality Assurance Terms
Event Support Documentation
Type of
Subject:
Issued By:
Document:
Notes:
Failure Status
Normal
Extreme
Operations Manager
Drilling & Completions Manager
Adverse
Innovative
Date:
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
229 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Appendix B - ABBREVIATIONS
AC/DC
AHTS
API
BG
BHA
BHP
BHT
BJ
BMT
BOP
BPD
BPM
BPV
BSW
BUR
BWOC
BWOW
C/L
CBL
CCD
CCL
CDP
CET
CGR
CMT
CP
CR
CRA
CSG
C/T
CW
DC
DE
DHM
DHSV
DIF
DLP
DLS
D&CM
DOB
DOBC
DOR
DP
DPHOT
DRLG
DST
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Alternate Current, Direct Current

Anchor Handling Towing Supply
American Petroleum Institute
Background gas
Bottom Hole Assembly
Bottom Hole Pressure
Bottom Hole temperature
Blast Joint
Blue Methylene Test
Blow Out Preventer
Barrel Per Day
Barrels Per Minute
Back Pressure Valve
Base Sediment and Water
Build Up Rate
By Weight Of Cement
By Weight Of Water
Control Line
Cement Bond Log
Centre to Centre Distance
Casing Collar Locator
Common Depth Point
Cement Evaluation Tool
Condensate Gas Ratio
Cement
Conductor Pipe
Cement Retainer
Corrosion Resistant Alloy
Casing
Coiled Tubing
Current Well
Drill Collar
Diatomaceous Earth
Down Hole Motor
Down Hole Safety Valve
Drill in Fluid
Dog Leg Potential
Dog Leg Severity
Drilling & Completion Manager
Diesel Oil Bentonite
Diesel Oil Bentonite Cement
Drop Off Rate
Drill Pipe
Drill Pipe Hang off Tool
Drilling
Drill Stem Test
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
230 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
DV
E/L
ECD
ECP
EMS
EMW
EOC
EP
ESD
ESP
ETA
ETU
FBHP
FBHT
FC
FINS
FPI/BO
FTHP
FTHT
GCT
GLR
GLS
GMS
GOC
GOR
GP
GPM
GPS
GR
GRA
GSS
HAZOP
HDT
HHP
HO
HP/HT
HSI
HW/HWDP
IADC
IBOP
ICGP
ID
IFR
IP
IPR
JAM
KMW
KOP
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
DV Collar
Electric Line
Equivalent Circulation Density
External Casing Packer
Electronic Multi Shot
Equivalent Mud Weight
End Of Curvature
External Pressure
Electric Shut-Down System
Electrical Submersible Pump
Expected Arrival Time
Endless Tubing Unit
Flowing Bottom Hole Pressure
Flowing Bottom Hole Temperature
Flow Coupling
Ferranti International Navigation System
Free Point Indicator / Back Off
Flowing Tubing Head Pressure
Flowing Tubing Head Temperature
Guidance Continuous Tool
Gas Liquid Ratio
Guidelineless Landing Structure
Gyro Multi Shot
Gas Oil Contact
Gas Oil Ratio
Gravel Pack
Gallon (US) per Minute
Global Positioning System
Gamma Ray
Guidelines Re-Entry Assembly
Gyro Single Shot
Hazard and Operability
High Resolution Dipmeter
Hydraulic Horsepower
Hole Opener
High Pressure - High Temperature
Horsepower per Square Foot
Heavy Weight Drill Pipe
International Drilling Contractor
Inside Blow Out Preventer
Inside Casing Gravel Packing
Inside Diameter
Imposta Fabbricazione Ridotta
Internal Pressure
Inflow Performance Relationship
Joint Make-up Torque Analyser
Kill Mud Weight
Kick Off Point
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
231 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
L/D
L/S
LAT
LC 50
LCDT
LCM
LCP
LEL
LMRP
LN
LOT
LQC
LTA
LTT
LWD
M/D
M/U
MAASP
MD
MLH
MLS
MMS
MODU
MOP
MPI
MSCL
MSL
MSS
MUT
MW
MWD
N/D
N/U
NACE
NB
NDT
NMDC
NSG
NTU
OBM
OD
OEDP
OH
OHGP
OIM
OMW
ORP
OWC
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Lay Down
Long String
Lowest Astronomical Tide
Lethal Concentration 50%
o
Last Crystal to Dissolve C
Lost Circulation Materials
Lower Circulation Position (GP)
Lower Explosive Limit
Low Marine Riser Package
Landing Nipple
Leak Off Test
Log Quality Control
Lost Time Accident
Lower Tell Table (GP)
Log While Drilling
Martin Decker
Make Up
Max Allowable Annular Surface Pressure
Measured Depth
Mudline Hanger
Mudline Suspension
Magnetic Multi Shot
Mobile Offshore Drilling Unit
Margin of Overpull
Magnetic Particle Inspection
Modular Single Completion Land
Mean Sea Level
Magnetic Single Shot
Make up Torque
Mud Weight
Measurement While Drilling
Nipple Down
Nipple Up
National Association of Corrosion Engineers
Near Bit Stabiliser
Non Destructive Test
Non Magnetic Drill Collar
North Seeking Gyro
Nephelometric Turbidity Unit
Oil Base Mud
Outside Diameter
Open End Drill Pipe
Open Hole
Open Hole Gravel Packing
Offshore Installation Manager
Original Mud weight
Origin Reference Point
Oil Water Contact
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
232 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
P&A
P/U
PBR
PCG
PDC
PDM
PGB
PI
PKR
PLT
POB
POOH
PPB
PPG
ppm
PTR
PV
PVT
Q
Q/A Q/C
R/D
R/U
RBP
RCP
RFT
RIH
RJ
RKB
ROE
ROP
ROU
ROV
RPM
RPSP
RT
S (HDT)
S/N
SBHP
SBHT
SCC
SD
SDE
SF
SG
SICP
SIDPP
SIMOP
SPM
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Plugged & Abandoned

Pick up
Polished Bore Receptacle
Pipe Connection Gas
Polycrystalline Diamond Cutter
Positive Displacement Motor
Permanent Guide Base
Productivity Index
Packer
Production Logging Tool
Personnel On Board
Pull Out Of Hole
Pounds per Barrel
Pounds per Gallon
Part Per Million
Piano Tavola Rotary
Plastic Viscosity
Pressure Volume Temperature
Flow Rate
Quality Assurance, Quality Control
Rig down
Rug up
Retrievable Bridge Plug
Reverse Circulating Position
Repeat Formation Test
Run In Hole
Ring Joint
Rotary Kelly Bushing
Radius of Exposure
Rate Of Penetration
Radios Of Uncertainty
Remote Operated Vehicle
Revolutions Per Minute
Reduced Pump Strokes
Rotary Table
High Resolution Dipmeter
Serial Number
Static Bottom Hole Pressure
Static Bottom Hole Temperature
Stress Corrosion Cracking
Separation Distance
Senior Drilling Engineer
Safety Factor
Specific Gravity
Shut-in Casing Pressure
Shut-in Drill Pipe Pressure
Simultaneous Operations
Stroke per Minute
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
233 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
SR
SRG
SSC
ST
STG
TCP
TD
TFA
TG
TGB
TOC
TOL
TVD
TW
UAR
UGF
UR
VBR
VDL
VSP
W/L
WBM
WC
WL
WOB
WOC
WOW
WP
YP
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Separation Ratio
Surface Readout Gyro
Sulphide Stress Cracking
Steering Tool
Short Trip Gas
Tubing Conveyed Perforations
Total Depth
Total Flow Area
Trip Gas
Temporary Guide Base
Top Of Cement
Top Of Liner
True Vertical Depth
Target Well
Uncertainty Area Ratio
Universal Guide Frame
Under Reamer
Variable Bore Rams (BOP)
Variable Density Log
Velocity Seismic Profile
Wire Line
Water Base Mud
Water Cut
Water Loss
Weight On Bit
Wait On Cement
Wait On Weather
Working Pressure
Yield Point
ARPO
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division
PAGE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
234 OF 234
REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-6140
Appendix C - BIBLIOGRAPHY
Document:
STAP Number
Best Practices For CRA Casing Handling And Running
STAP-A-1-M-1002
Directional Drilling Manual
STAP-P-1-M-6120
Drill String/Bottom Hole Assembly Monitoring Procedures

For Severe or Particular Drilling Condition
STAP-M-1-M-5008
Drilling Design Manual
STAP-P-1-M-6100
Drilling Fluids Manual
STAP-P-1-M-6160
Drilling Jar Acceptance and Utilisation Procedures
STAP-M-1-M 5003
Drilling Jar Acceptance And Utilisation Procedures
STAP-M-1-M-5003
Mud Manual
STAP l N 6051
Procedure Per La Perforazions Di pozzi A Mare In Presenza

Di H2S
STAP-P-1-M-6035 E
Shallow Gas Drilling Guidelines
STAP-P-1-M011
Well Control Policy Manual
STAP-P-1-M-6150
Other
API Specification 6A seventeenth edition 1996
API Specification No 811-05CT5

Drilling Procedures Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Drilling Procedures Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ARPO

Purpose of the document

UPDATING, AMENDMENT, CONTROL & DEROGATION

SUMMARY OF OPERATIONS (Land Rig or Jack-Ups)

Conductor Pipe Installation

Drilling 26" Hole

Drilling Slim Hole (5 /8 or 6)

4.10. Top Drive Drilling SystemS

SUMMARY OF OPERATIONS (Semi-Submersible)

BOP Stack equipment

Fail Safe Valves

BOP Control System

RISER AND DIVERTER SYSTEM

RUNNING THE BOP ANd RISER SYSTEM

Drilling with Oil-Based Mud

Minimum stock requirements

TRIPPING AND FILL-UP PROCEDURES

Tripping with a top drive

DRILLING STRING DESIGN/STABILISATION

STRAIGHT HOLE DRILLING

Dog-Leg And Key Seat Problems

HOLE ANGLE CONTROL

DESIGNING A PACKED HOLE ASSEMBLY

PACKED BOTTOM HOLE ASSEMBLIES

PENDULUM BOTTOM HOLE ASSEMBLIES

REDUCED BIT WEIGHT

DRILL STRING DESIGN

BOTTOM HOLE ASSEMBLY Buckling

8.10. SUMMARY RECOMMENDATIONS FOR STABILISATION

8.11. OPERATING LIMITS OF DRILL PIPE

8.12. GENERAL GUIDELINES

TERMINOLOGY AND CONVENTIONS

RIG/TARGET LOCATIONS AND HORIZONTAL DISPLACEMENT

HIGH SIDE OF THE HOLE AND TOOL FACE

10.1. CORE BARREL TYPES AND USES

10.2. GENERAL GUIDELINES

10.3. CORING PROCEDURES

10.4. Coring In Deviated Holes

11. LEAK OFF TEST PROCEDURE

12. CASING RUNNING AND CEMENTING

12.2. CRA CASING OPERATIONS

12.3. CEMENTING AND DISPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

12.4. Mudline Suspension Procedures

12.5. Post-Cementing Operations

13.1. Logging While Drilling (LWD) COnsiderations

13.2. Wireline logging

14. WELL ABANDONMENT

14.1. Temporary Abandonment

14.2. PERMANENT ABANDONMENT

14.3. Casing cutting/retrieving

Stub Termination (Below A Casing String)

15. SURFACE WELLHEAD

15.2. BASE FLANGE INSTALLATION

15.3. RECOMMENDED FLANGE BOLT TORQUE

15.4. COMPACT WELLHEAD

15.5. MUDLINE SUSPENSION

16. DRILLING PROBLEMS

16.1. STUCK PIPE

16.2. STICKING DUE TO HOLE RESTRICTION

16.3. STICKING DUE TO CAVING HOLE

16.4. OIL PILLS

16.6. FISHING PROCEDURES

16.7. Milling Procedure

16.8. Jarring Procedure